IUT110 Introduction

Introduction to the IS-U/CCS System

IUT110

o n l y

u s e

b y

C S C

„ 2005/Q1 „ Material number: 50071400

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ SAP IS-Utilities/Customer Care Service 472

u s e

o n l y

F o r

SAP AG 2004  SAP AG©2003

i n t e r n a l

THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP

F o r

Introduction to the IS-U/CCS System

Copyright

Copyright 2004 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

C S C

b y

u s e

i n t e r n a l

b y

o n l y

F o r

u s e

„ Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. „ Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. „ IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. „ Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. „ UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. „ Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. „ HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. „ Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. „ JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. „ MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden. „ SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. „ These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2004

Course Prerequisites

z Basic knowledge of SAP R/3 (For example, course SAP01 Overview, previously SAP 020: SAP R/3 Overview) z Knowledge of business processes in a utility company z Basic knowledge of the Windows environment

b y

u s e

o n l y

F o r

b y

C S C

u s e

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

Target Group

z Participants Decision makers using IS-U to support business processes

„

Project managers responsible for implementing IS-U

„

Project team modeling business processes with IS-U

„

Administrators optimizing processes in the IS-U environment

„

Consultants preparing for IS-U implementation

o n l y

z Duration

u s e

o n l y

F o r

b y

C S C

u s e

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

5 days

i n t e r n a l

C S C

„

F o r

b y

„

Course Goals

This course will prepare you to: z Recognize how IS-U is integrated in the R/3 environment z Outline business processes in IS-U z Use and efficiently implement IS-U

b y

u s e

o n l y

F o r

b y

C S C

u s e

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

Course Objectives

At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to: z Describe the integration of IS-U in R/3 z Perform the core business processes of IS-U z Explain the structure and processes of IS-U

b y

u s e

o n l y

F o r

b y

C S C

u s e

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

Preface Unit 8

Billing Master Data

Unit 2

Master Data - CIC

Unit 9

Billing & Invoicing

Unit 3

Move-In/Out

Unit 10

Energy Data Management

Unit 4:

Work Management

Unit 11

Real-Time Pricing

Unit 5

Device Technology

Unit 12

Budget Billings

Unit 6

Device Installation

Unit 13

Unit 7

Meter Reading

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Unit 14

Waste Disposal Industry

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ CIC: Customer Interaction Center

b y

o n l y

F o r

Appendix  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

IS-U/CCS Overview

i n t e r n a l

Unit 1

F o r

o n l y

Course Content

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

b y

u s e

u s e

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

IS-U/CCS: Overview

Contents: z Integration of IS-U/CCS in standard SAP components z Incorporation of IS-U/CCS into the core business processes of a utility company in regulated and deregulated markets z Overview of IS-U/CCS functions

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-1

IS-U/CCS Overview: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Explain the integration of IS-U/CCS (IndustrySpecific Component - Utilities / Customer Care and Service) in the SAP standard components z Name the most important SAP components and their roles in the utilities industry z Describe the functions of IS-U/CCS

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-2

IS-U Overview: Business Scenario

z The course participants are new employees of eNRG Ltd z You are taking part in a 5-day training program z Your main tasks will be customer-oriented processes in the customer center z You will use typical business processes to become familiar with the IS-U/CCS structure

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-3

mySAP.com: Overview PERSONAL - individually adaptable - role-specific - standard entry into all internal and external services

INTEGRATED - platform for business co-operation - industry-specific - integrated, universal business processes

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

- building of business relationships (virtual communities) - integration of external services (content) - "One-Step Business" (co-operation) - application hosting - Internet business framework

i n t e r n a l

„ The mySAP.com concept consists of three areas: • The my area stands for easy access to all elements of mySAP.com. Based on the results of the EnjoySAP initiative, the mySAP.com workplace provides personalized, role-based system access.

b y

• The SAP area represents the availability of enterprise software over the Internet.

F o r

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-4

o n l y

• The .com area stands for the Internet initiative of SAP. Trade relations and business co-operation can be initiated and developed over the Internet.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

F o r

o n l y

CO-OPERATIVE

Portal Internet Business Framework Leg. Leg. R/2 R/2 system system Ext. Ext. Open Comp. Comp. Internet Standards

Single SignOn

mySAP mySAP Utilities Utilities IS-U/CCS IS-U/CCS

Portal Portal

Industry-specific Industry-specific Role-based Role-based Personalized Personalized Drag Drag && Relate Relate

KM KM

C S C

b y

u s e

B2B B2B mySAP.com components BW BW CRM CRM

Com within pany Limi ts Partner Partner outside

mySAP.com Internet services SAP SAP

 SAP AG 2003

„ The Workplace contains links to information within and outside company limits. Links can be made to:

b y

• Non mySAP.com components and external systems via open Internet standards

o n l y

• mySAP.com Internet services: mySAP.com Marketplace • Any Internet or intranet Websites

IUT110

C S C

• mySAP.com components: Classical and new Web-based R/3 transactions (standard R/3 System, New Dimensions, industry solutions), Reports (such as Business Information Warehouse reports in BW 3.1), Knowledge Warehouse content

© SAP AG

u s e

i n t e r n a l

Other Internet services

APO APO

i n t e r n a l

MarketMarketplace place

LO LO HR HR SEM SEM

F o r

F o r

R/3 R/3 Enterprise Enterprise

FI FI

o n l y

Web browser access

not mySAP.com

1-5

Strat Strategic egicEnterpris Ent erprisee Management Management

Cust Customer omer Ser Servic vicee

Engi Engineeri neering ng && Construction Construct ion

Manageri Managerialal Accounti Acc ounting ng

Data Data War Warehousi ehousing ng

Financial Financial Acc Accounti ounting ng

Marketi Marketing ng Program Program Management Management

Product/ Product/ Brand BrandM Mar arketing keting

Regul Regulator at oryy Reporti Reporting/FERC ng/FERC

Sales Sales Channels Channels

Sales SalesMManag anagement ement

Production Production

Pl Plant antM Maiaintenance ntenance

Dec Decommi ommissi ssioni oning ng

Engi Engineeri neering ng && Construction Construct ion

Operati Operations onsManagement Management

Maintenanc Maint enancee&& Work WorkMManag anagement ement

Trans sion && Transmis mission Distributi Distribution on SService ervice

Sales SalesCCycl yclee&& Billi Billing ng

Connecti Connection on &&Install Installati ation on Management Management

Ser Service vic e Management Management

Meter MeterRReadi eading ng Management Management

Ser e Servic vice Agreement Agreement

Speci SpecialalCCust ustomer omer Proc ess es Process es

Ret Retail ailBilli Billing ng

Sales SalesCCycl yclee&&

Energ EnergyyDData ata Management Management

Invoici Invoicing ng

Business

Business ellig enc BusinessInt Intellig encee &&

Market earch MarketRRes esearch &&Anal Analysi ysiss

Human HumanRRes esource ource Management Management

Traders Traders Workbench Workbench

Ris Riskk Management Management

Rec Receieivables vablesMManag anagement ement

Procurement Proc urement

Treas Treasururyy

Whol Wholesal esalee Billi Billing ng

Pool/ Pool/ ISO ISO

Reconcili Rec onciliation ation &&Settl Settlement ement

Third ThirdPart PartyySettl S ettlement ement

Fixed FixedAss Assetet Management Management

Real RealEstate Estate

z SAP Customer Relationship Management z SAP Supply Chain Management z SAP Business Intelligence z SAP Business-to-Business E-Commerce

C S C

z Finance & Controlling z Human Resource Management z Logistics

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Network

F o r

o n l y

mySAP Utilities: The Comprehensive Solution

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-6

Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

Mobile Sales

F o r

o n l y

Contact Center

Internet Sales

• Mobile Sales Scenario: Enables field service employees to access all the information necessary for their job. The data is saved on a lap-top database and is regularly aligned with the CRM System.

C S C

• Contact Center Scenario: Along with the Customer Interaction Center (CIC), this forms one of the key components of SAP CRM. The CIC enables processing of incoming and outgoing telephone calls using the SAPphone CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) interface, processing of incoming and outgoing E-mails and activity management (recording of all contacts in the contact center). The CIC can be used in service (Service Interaction Center SIC), sales and distribution or marketing (telesales and telemarketing).

o n l y

i n t e r n a l

„ SAP Customer Relationship Management (CRM) provides solutions that enable companies to effectively maintain customer relationships throughout the entire life cycle. CRM supports companies by understanding and anticipating the requirements of their customer base as well as those of potential customers. SAP CRM is subdivided into four main business scenarios:

b y

F o r

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

• Internet Sales Scenario: Enables electronic business activities to take place over the World Wide Web between companies, and between companies and end-customers (B2C). • Business-to-Business Procurement (SAP BBP): The SAP solution for business activities taking place between companies over the World Wide Web.

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-7

9 Service level management 9 Customer development management Customer Acquisition 9 Customer retention marketing management Business partner 9 Success analysis Activities Opportunities Problem solution DB Orders, contracts Quotations Complaints and so on

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Sales

9 Field service sales 9 Telesales 9 Internet sales (B2C) 9 Internet sales (B2B) 9Sales management and support 9 Success analysis

i n t e r n a l

9 Service Interaction Center 9 Internet Self Services SERVICE 9 Service Center 9 Field service 9 Success analysis

9 Market analysis 9 Marketing planning 9 Campaign management 9 Internet marketing 9 Telemarketing 9 Success analysis

F o r

o n l y

CRM Functionality

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-8

Business Information Warehouse (BW)

Efficient Analysis of Information - innovative and intuitive user interface - efficient OLAP analysis functions - for all types of user

C S C

b y

u s e

R/3

Other

 SAP AG 2003

„ SAP BW requests application data in regular intervals from the allocated source systems (pull mechanism). The back-end systems therefore contain extractors that collect data and deliver it to the SAP Business Information Warehouse.

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-9

o n l y

„ SAP BW contains all the necessary Metadata for current business processes. This includes InfoSources, InfoCubes and standard reports, transfer structures for all releases and communication structures and update rules for each InfoCube. These elements are part of the ready-to-go strategy that supports automatic data transfer with immediate analysis according to installation of the system and naming of the source system.

C S C

„ The SAP Business Information Warehouse supports Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) and is especially suitable for processing large volumes of operative and historical data.

b y

„ The SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) is the mySAP.com business component that is used to extract and analyze data from operative business applications (OLTP systems). Besides OLTP Systems such as R/3 and SAP BBP (Business-to-Business Procurement: Business process in E-Commerce that enables employees to purchase goods and services directly from suppliers), other external data sources such as databases or online services also can be connected. OLTP stands for Online Transaction Processing.

u s e

i n t e r n a l

End-to-End Data Warehousing Solutions - extraction of R/3 data and external data - fully automated - central control

i n t e r n a l

F o r

F o r

o n l y

Extensive Business Content - information model, reports and extractors - Metadata repository - company comparison values

o n l y

transmission

Distribution

Customer service & billing

All customer-related business processes IS-U/ CCS

Customer Relationship Management Particular business processes

PM MM

Marketing & Sales

SD

FI

Premise entry Installation services

Premise billing Service billing

Invoicing

Contract A/R & A/P

Invoicing

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Generation

F o r

Meter Management & Device Management (IS-U and PM/MM) CRM

Work Management  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Functional Scope of the IS-U System

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-10

Integrated and Open System Landscape

SAP BW

ITS

SAP IS-U/ CCS Back end

CTI

Telebusiness

Mobile Applications

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

Analyses

Business objects such as business partner, activities, contracts, products, sales and distribution projects

F o r

Front end

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Electronic business (Internet)

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-11

IS-U/CCS Business Processes

SAP BW

Analyses

Telebusiness

o n l y

distribution projects

SAP IS-U/ CCS Back end

Mobile Applications

i n t e r n a l

C S C

9Device 9Device Management Management ITS 9Billing 9Billing 9Invoicing 9Invoicing Business objects as business 9Contract Receivable and Payable 9Contract Accounts Accountssuch Receivable partner, activities, 9Intercompany Exchange 9Intercompany Data Data Exchange CTI contracts, products, 9Energy 9Energy Data Data Management Management sales and 9... 9...

F o r

Front end

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Electronic business (Internet)

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-12

Synchronized Business Objects

SAP BW

SAP IS-U/ CCS Back end

ITS

CTI

Telebusiness

Mobile Applications

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

Analyses

Business 9Business 9Business partner partner objects such as 9Contract 9Contract accounts accounts business partner, activities, contracts, 9Contracts 9Contracts 9Connection 9Connection objects objects products, sales and distribution 9Points 9Points of of delivery delivery projects

F o r

Front end

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Electronic business (Internet)

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-13

Marketing and Sales Process 3) Transfer of target group to SAP CRM

SAP BW

1(a) Import of external addresses to target Analyses group selection

SAP IS-U/ CCS Back end

Telebusiness

11) Automatic creation of contracts 12) IDE communication with prior supplier or transmission company 13) Automatic creation or change of master data ----Mobile 14) Transfer of meter reading results Components 15) Billing and invoicing 16) Transfer of sales and transaction statistics to BW Front 17) end Optional: Commission determination

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

CTI

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

Business partner transfer to target group selection

Business objects such as business partner, contracts and products.

F o r

b y

4) Marketing planning Electronic 5) Campaign creation business 6) Campaign execution (Internet) 7) Activity management 8) Campaign feedback (BW) 9) Contract creation ITS synchronization 10) Contract

2) Target group selection

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-14

System Infrastructure CRM, BW and mySAP Utilities Customer Development Service Level Mgmt Service Center

Marketing Retention Analysis Management

Information system

TeleMarketing

Field Sales

Field Service Internet Customer Bus.Part. Service Self Sales Mgmt CollaborService Interaction ation Center & Support

Internet Sales TeleSales

Of business partner, contract accounts, contracts, connection object and point of delivery

rs to c tra ecific p d Ex

BW

4.71

Sectors:

Electricity Installation Gas Services Water Waste Water

Device Management District Heating Meters/Devices/Connecti Waste Disposal Cable TV ons Service Order Work Service Contract Management Goods

From R/3 master data and transaction data to target group selection and other analyses in BW

mySAP BW 3.1

Charges Taxes / Fees

mySAP Financials

i n t e r n a l

F la t f exte iles fro r m pros nal da ta pec ts a such a nd s s o on

C S C

Consumption Entry

BW Extractors

Data Transfer From selected target groups, top n analyses and other analyses in BW in accordance with CRM

mySAP Utilities

et rg ta -s an to BW a -U BW IS ata dat in d m r o n io n o Fr aste cti lect m nsa se tra oup gr

Ex Fr an o m tra al C ct ys RM or is s in d a t BW a to

o n l y

Resid. Cust. Nonresid. Cust. Sales Cust. Marketing & Sales Service Cust. Prospect Owner Billing & Contract Bill Recipient Invoicing Accounting Installer

Replication via CRM Middleware

Internet Marketing

mySAP CRM 4.0

Business Partners:

F o r

External Data

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Product & Brand Mgmt

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-15

FI Financial Accounting

E

V

Pre m entr ise y

S ER

Device Management

CO AM

C S C

b y

E &

PM

MM

Components of IS-U

External Premise Entry Systems

Components Standard SAP External systems

GIS, CAD, SCADA

i n t e r n a l

Asset Management & Materials Management  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

R

Customer information system

F o r

SD

PM/ CS

SAP Business partner

IC

MM

C A on (F /R tra I-C + c t A A/ P C )

Plant Maintenance & Customer Service

External Sales Systems

In Bill vo in ic g/ in g TOM S E U R

„ Central business partner model (R/3) => the customer is the central data object „ Cross-application component FI-CA for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

o n l y

„ Industry-specific enhancements for the utilities industry enable the use of the standard R/3 component PM/CS (Plant Maintenance/Customer Service). => ideal prerequisites for processing service activities „ PM/CS is integrated with the following components: • SD: Management of customer quotations and orders, and also execution of billing • CO: Allocation and clearing of costs related to service activities • MM: Processing of material requirements and goods movement related to service activities „ The results of service billing can be transferred to IS-U invoicing; further processing of debits occurs via FI-CA. „ Material master records are managed in MM at the same time as device categories in IS-U; purchasing and stockholding of devices are processed using MM components

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

• Designed for processing a large volume of postings from sales and collection activities for a large number of customers

b y

i n t e r n a l

Sales & Distribution

CA

F o r

IS-U/CCS as an integrated component of the SAP enterprise information system

SD

n atio s tall Ins rvice se

o n l y

IS-U/CCS - Integration Model

1-16

o n l y

; Integration of application areas „ Homogeneous interaction between accounting and core logistics

processes „ Business processes for all areas „ Shorter lead times for business processes

; Flexibility „ „ „ „

Can be adapted to local deregulation rules Can be implemented in all types of companies Supports all types of service Enables development of individual business strategy

; CustomerCustomer-orientation „ „ „ „ „

User friendly Oriented to business processes Competitively oriented Informative Communicative

i n t e r n a l

C S C

; DeregulationDeregulation-enabled functionality

F o r

; Open architecture SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

The Strengths of mySAP Utilities

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-17

Solutions for the New Industry Market Model Solution Map SAP Utilities Classic utility company

Deregulation Transmission & distribution

Sales & Distribution

Generation

transmission Distribution Device Management

Marketing, SD, billing, customer service customer service

b y

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Generation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-18

Consumption values, grid usage bills, customer and technical data

Electronic data exchange Distributor Customer change, changes to customer data, payment for grid usage, service requests Closes supply contracts bills, collection

C S C

Provides the supply grid and accompanying services

i n t e r n a l

Customer  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Supplier

F o r

o n l y

Deregulated Market: Business Perspective

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-19

CallCall-Center Functionality Faster and more direct access to all relevant information and transactions required during contact with customers is admissible. This includes customer overviews, changing master data, displaying bills, entering meter reading results, account information and so on.

„

Work items allow callbacks and outbound campaigns.

Master data template „

Product modeling on the basis of configured materials and pricing in SD. The master data generator is used to post-edit campaigns.

ISIS-U content for BW

C S C

„

Sales statistics, consumption statistics, transaction statistics and so on

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

F o r

o n l y

Sales and Marketing in IS-U/CCS (1)

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-20

Sales and Marketing in IS-U/CCS (2) SAP Utility Customer E-Services 1.0

Offset Credits With Open items E-mail Notification

Dispute Message

Bill Details

Edit Bank Data Bill History

Bill Payment

o n l y

Partial Payments

Edit Master Data

Payment History

Enter Meter Reading Move-In

Edit Credit Card Move-Out Move In/Out

Direct Debit Support

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

from IS-U/CCS 4.64 from IS-U/CCS 4.72 (downgrade 4.64 in project possible)  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Credits Overview

Bill Display

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-21

Sales Processing Product selection using mySAP CRM channels:

Master data generation or change in mySAP Utilities: Fixed Fixed product product information information

Master Master data data template template

mySAP mySAP CRM CRM product product

mySAP mySAP Utilities Utilities product product

mySAP Utilities

Configuration Configuration

Configuration Configuration

o n l y

F o r

C S C

Variable Variable product product information information

i n t e r n a l

Workflow  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Master Master data data generator generator

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-22

IS-U Overview: Unit Summary

z IS-U/CCS supports customer-oriented core business

processes of utility and service companies. z IS-U/CCS is an integrated component of the SAP

enterprise information system. z IS-U/CCS can be used for billing and managing

standard divisions as well as additional new services.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

1-23

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

1-24

IUT110

© SAP AG

Master Data and the CIC

Contents: z Master data z Objectives of the Customer Interaction Center (CIC) z Typical processing steps z Implementation and use z Most important application areas

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Customer contacts

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-1

Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Name the most important IS-U/CCS business

objects z Describe the range of applications z Explain the elements of the Customer Interaction

Center

F o r

o n l y

z Carry out some typical customer processes z Create and use customer contacts

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-2

Business scenario

z Customer call and identification via Front Office z Data environment „

Display of business data

z Changes to data „

Change bank details

„

Change rates

z Customer contact

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-3

Master Data - The IS-U House

Connection object

Apartment 1= Premise Contract Contract 1: 1: Electricity Electricity

Contract Contract account account

C S C

Service Connection: Water

Device Device location location Hall Hall

Apartment 2

Gas Gas meter meter Installation Installation 3: 3: Water Water meter meter

Device Device location location Basement Basement

Service Connection: Gas

Basement

Service Connection: Electricity

i n t e r n a l

Supply Grid

Street  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Contract Contract 3: 3: Water Water

Installation Installation 2: 2:

Apartment 3

F o r

o n l y

Business partner

Contract Contract 2: 2: Gas Gas

Hall Installation Installation 1: 1: Electricity Electricity meter meter

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-4

Owners

Debtors

SAP Business partner Installer

Tenants

Prospect Employee

z z z

C S C

z

Individuals and companies Business partner relationships Flexible interfaces Integration of business roles

Commercial and industrial customer

i n t e r n a l

Groups

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Customer

F o r

o n l y

Various Business Partners

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-5

Roles of the Business Partner

• Name • Address • Personal data • Communication

Business partner

Contract partner

• Payment

• Branch of industry • Relationships • Contact history • ...

i n t e r n a l

„ The central business partner concept enables you to: • Define the business partner globally

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Definition of roles: Roles are defined specifications for a business partner.

b y

• Model different roles for a business partner in the system „ The specific roles of the business partner in IS-U are: • Contract partner

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

• Type of company • Division license • Work field • License •Identification • ...

Prospect

F o r

transactions • General data (account class, social insurance, credit worthiness...)

Installer

• Installer • Contact person • Prospect • Other roles and data fields are dependent on Customizing settings. „ A business partner is included in different business processes, depending on his or her role: • A customer receiving utility and maintenance services • A bill recipient • Supplier • A prospect targeted by marketing activities • The owner of an apartment or house

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-6

Business Partner Data

Form of address, name Legal form, company z Group, search terms z z

z

Addresses Standard address z P.O. box address z Other addresses z

SAP Business partner

o n l y

Bank details

Biller Direct

Additional data

Communication

Status Identification numbers z Legitimization z Register entry

Telephone, fax z Extension z Internet, e-mail, online

z

z

C S C

b y

Payment transactions

z

Data for all roles

Data for specific roles

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

z

i n t e r n a l

„ Business partners are divided into various groups, to which different attributes are allocated. IS-U differentiates between:

b y

• Individuals • Organizations

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Hierarchical Equal z Connected z

F o r

• Groups „ Depending on the business context, the business partner can assume different roles. IS-U differentiates between:

o n l y

F o r

BP Relationships

General

• Contract partner • Installer • Contact person • Prospect Other roles depend on Customizing „ A sales and distribution (SD) business partner is created in the background for each contract partner.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-7

Contract Account Data

General data z z

z z

z

Dunning control Dunning letter recipient Dunning block reason

Incoming payments Control z z

z

Alternative bill recipient Paid by collective bill account Additional bill

z

Contract

z z

Outgoing payments z z z

z z z z

Where-used list for Ols Planning group Account determination Clearing category

Payment method Bank details Alternate payer

account

Account assignment

o n l y

C S C

b y

z

Payment method Bank details Alternate payee

i n t e r n a l

Biller Direct

General data

Dunning/payment data

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ A contract account groups together all of a business partner's contracts that have the same payment and dunning data. Contracts that are created with the business partner are allocated to the contract account. As a result, any number of contracts can be allocated to a contract account.

u s e

u s e

z

F o r

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Dunning data

Account name Account no. in legacy system Terms of payment Tolerance group

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-8

Contract Contract partner partner

Contract account 1

Contract 1 (Elec. - domestic)

Contract 2 (Water - domestic)

Contract account 2

Contract Contract account account collective collective bill bill

Contract 3 (Gas - business)

Contract 4 (Elec. - business)

Collective bill

100.-Total : 450.--

Contract account

Contract 5 (Elec. - business)

50.--

(Statistical posting to contract collective billing account CBA 1)

Optional Bill CA 2 Total : 400.--

Bill CA 3 Total : 50.--

C S C

b y

300.--

Total : 250.--

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

100.--

i n t e r n a l

„ The collective bill account is a contract account that is created in the business master data of the utilities industry and is marked as a collective bill account. Several contract accounts can refer to the same collective bill account.

b y

„ The collective bill account groups together items that are posted to the individual accounts and that refer to the collective bill account under one or more collective bills. Only items with the same due date and origin can be grouped together in a collective bill.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Bill CA 1

150.--

F o r

o n l y

Collective Bills

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-9

o n l y

C S C

b y

Contract account Division Company code Individual/operation consumption Statistics group Authorization groups

• Account determination ID • Cost center • Business area

Sales data Move-in/Move-out data • Installation • Move-in date • Move-out date

• Sales partner •Representative • Sales document

Contract (Billable service)

Deregulation data • Service Provider • Service provider invoicing • External contract number • Payment class

Scheduling data • Contract start/end date • Renewal dates • Cancellation dates

Data Relevant to Budget Billing

Data Relevant to Billing • Joint invoice • Billing Blocking Reason • Outsorting group

• Budget billing adjustment • Budget billing cycle

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

• • • • • •

Account assignment data

i n t e r n a l

„ In the field 'Statistics Group', you specify the statistics group for a contract. This is used for determining data for sales statistics.

„ The outsorting group determines which validations are to be carried out in billing. A contract can also be outsorted manually. „ The meter reading block reason specifies why the contract has been blocked for meter readings. If you make an entry in this field, the contract can no longer be billed. The contract will not be released again for billing until you enter a billing release reason (the billing release reason overrides the billing block reason). „ A billing area is an organizational unit that covers a restricted area of activity/responsibility in your company. Value movements entered in Financial Accounting can be attributed to this business area for the purposes of external accounting. „ Schedule data is provided mainly for information purposes. It allows you to display information on when a contract was signed or cancelled, for example.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-10

o n l y

„ If you maintain data relevant to budget billing (for example the budget billing cycle) in the contract, the data you enter overrides the default values defined in the portion or in the Customizing settings.

C S C

„ The Authorization Group prevents unauthorized access to specific objects. To be able to carry out any activity protected in this way, the user must have authorization for both the activity and the authorization group.

b y

i n t e r n a l

General Contract Data

F o r

F o r

Contract Data

Connection Object Data

• Description • Processing status • Notes

Plant Maintenance • Structure • Maintenance planning plant • Maintenance planning group

o n l y

C S C

b y

• Maintenance plant • Location description • ABC indicator

Connection object

Address • Street, house number • Postal code, city • Political regional structure

Additional data

Attributes

• Structure/equipment list • Account assignment

• Regional structure group • Authorization groups

PM data

i n t e r n a l

IS-U data

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ A connection object is normally a building. However, it can be a plot of land or other structure such as a fountain or a building site. The connection object corresponds to the functional location in the Plant Maintenance (PM) component and has the same key.

u s e

u s e

General

F o r

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Location data

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-11

Premise Data

z z z

z z

Premise type Owners Number of occupants

Premise

z z

z

Can comprise several installations to be billed

Technical

Additional data

o n l y

C S C

b y

Installation

Attributes z

Forms the link between the premise and the regional structure

Notes Update log

z

General data

Can be assigned to a device location

i n t e r n a l

Relationships

 SAP AG 2003

„ The premise is a spatially enclosed unit (such as an apartment, factory floor) that has to be supplied.

b y

„ The premise is allocated to a connection object.

u s e

u s e

z

Floor Room number Location description

F o r

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Connection object

Location data

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-12

Installation Data

z z z z

z

Business partner

Control data z z z

Supply or consumption Definition of base period Meter reading control

o n l y

C S C

b y

z

Installation

z z z

z

Conclusion of the contract with the business partner

Regional structure

Additional data z

Rate category Rate data for device and registers Reference value

Installation type Guarantee of supply Notes Update log

z

z

General data

Linked via the premise and connection object Override default meter reading unit

i n t e r n a l

Relationships

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

„ An installation is always allocated to just one contract. In some exceptions it is not allocated to a contract (for example, installation is under construction, there is no owner for the installation).

b y

„ An installation groups together division-specific devices, registers and, if necessary, reference values that are allocated to a premise and, as a result, are billed jointly. This can be, for example, an on- and off-peak meter.

u s e

u s e

Current premise Current business partners Current contract

F o r

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Billing

Process data

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-13

Point of Delivery Data

Header data

Point of Delivery ID • Structure category • History

• Description • Point of delivery type • Point of delivery role

Point of delivery Deregulation Technical

i n t e r n a l

„ A point of delivery is identified by a unique key, which is called the point of delivery ID This is used for communicating with external systems. The unique ID ensures that registered data and information about a utility service that is rendered at a point of delivery is not incorrectly allocated, even when a customer switches his or her utility company.

„ Technical point of delivery: Example - Communication with an automated meter reading system. This type of communication is used in the component Energy Data Management (SAP IS-U EDM) for importing profile values.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-14

o n l y

„ Deregulation point of delivery: Communication between different utility companies in a deregulated energy market. For example: Exchange of consumption information between a distributor and a supplier.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Definition: Point to which a utility service is supplied or to which a utility service can be determined for a customer

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

• Register

F o r

• Installation • Premise • Service type • Grid (distributor) • Settlement unit

Business Objects in IS-U/CCS IS-U IS-U Regional structure

SD CS PM

Cross Cross appl. appl. Integration with Logistics

Contract account

Contract (utility)

Service

o n l y

Point of delivery

Device category

Installation

Premise

Device

Device location

Connection object

F o r

C S C

Connection

i n t e r n a l

Meter reading  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Business partner

FI-CA FI-CA

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-15

What Is a Customer Interaction Center?

z An application component that provides a multi-level, integrated platform for interactive processing of business transactions. z The Customer Interaction Center's extensive functions enable agents to provide maximum customer service, process incoming and outgoing calls, as well as analyze and solve problems fast and effectively.

o n l y

F o r

„ Large utility companies process several million customer- oriented business processes annually. „ There are usually special departments for this:

b y

• Customer center

C S C

• Call center • Customer service representatives

o n l y

„ The IS-U Customer Interaction Center (CIC) supports these departments in the system.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-16

Demands on the Customer Interaction Center

z Efficient user interface, short training period z All common service functions directly accessible z Entry with incomplete data and comprehensive search help z User-specific adjustment of the interface and of the available business processes z Connection to external communication systems (for example, Computer Telephony Integration (CTI), Internet)

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-17

Integration with External Communication Systems

WWW

Fax

Letter

Archive integration

Telephone Call center Integration

Internet

In person

Internet Integration

F o r

o n l y

IS-U/CCS Front Office functions

„ The following slides describe the three most important interfaces: • Archiving of documents created in IS-U (for example invoices to customers, welcome letters, and so on.), as well as archiving incoming (or outgoing) documents which are initially only available in paper form (faxes, letters, and so on).

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ As a customer information system, IS-U/CCS enables you to integrate external communication systems in your daily work.

b y

• Integration with a call center solution via the SAPphone component.

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

IS-U Customer information system

• Access to IS-U functionality via the Internet or via an intranet.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-18

o n l y

C S C

b y

Initiate workflow

Customer Customer contact contact

Customizing

Identification z z z z

Definable field selection Use AND to join fields Generic search with * Display results

Information z z z

X

Front Office: Initial Screen Front office Edit Goto System Help

Clipboard z

Context

Processe s

z z

Search criteria Name: last/first Street/house number PostCd/city/cntry Business partner Activity date

Addr.Cat. Bus. part. Conn.obj.

Temporary storage of business objects Quick follow-up calls Good contextual overview

Tel. no.

Technical Customer PremiseInstallation Call Description

Processes

Display of business objects List of several related business objects E.g. customer, contract account, contacts, bills, etc.

z z z

Front Office processes R/3 workflow processes E.g. customer changes, service connection process

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Service function

i n t e r n a l

„ The CIC is available in two different layouts. The CIC with different vertical screen areas (see above) is the standard layout. In the L-shape format (see next page), selected sectors including utilities, media and telecommunications are available.

b y

„ The CIC/Front Office screen is divided into four different areas:

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Identification Information

F o r

• Clipboard (also called business data display). Used to temporarily save processed business objects. • Identification (search criteria, data finder): This is where you enter search criteria to locate a business object. Examples of search criteria include a name, address or telephone number.

o n l y

F o r

The IS-U/CCS Customer Interaction Center

• Information (business object display): Once the relevant business objects have been identified, various types of information can be displayed. • Processes: This is a list of change transactions, Front Office processes, and workflows which can be carried out for previously identified business objects.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-19

Identification Identification

Telephony Telephony Functions Functions

Call Call Status Status

Action Action box box

Application Application area area Customer overview Customer overview R/3 R/3 transactions transactions User-defined User-defined HTML HTML pages pages Web Web pages pages

i n t e r n a l

„ The concept of the CIC (L-shaped) focuses on processing the business partner. „ The central areas are:

b y

• Identification area

C S C

• Navigation area • Action box

o n l y

• Application area

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Navigation Navigation area area

F o r

o n l y

Customer Interaction Center (L-Shaped)

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-20

Workflow Inbox z In the application area of the CIC z List of all work items to be performed z E-mail and fax inbox

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-21

E-Mail and Fax in the Workflow Inbox E-mail, fax, fax, letters letters (scanned documents) . .

Business partner

Work item in inbox for Email, fax letters

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

tes Execu

Workflow

F o r

Customer data data displayed in CIC

Call center agent  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Confirmation

System

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-22

Identification

Of:

Supported by

z Business partners and associated data such as connection objects

z Data finder

C S C

b y

u s e

„ The CIC enables the customer service agent to quickly identify the customer or process, even if the customer's details are incomplete.

u s e

b y

„ CTI = Computer Telephony Integration

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

z Integration with external communication systems, e.g. CTI

F o r

o n l y

Typical Uses of the CIC: Identification

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-23

Identification

Information

Supported by z Adjustable lists

F o r

z Information masks

i n t e r n a l

„ Once the customer has been identified, the agent can display information on the customer, his or her installations, as well as previous and current transactions.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Typical Uses of the CIC: Information

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-24

Identification

If necessary, carry out front Information office processes

Supported by: z Predefined and company-specific business processes (e.g. name changes, changes in bank details, move-in processing, interim billing, various types of complaints)

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ Standard business processes are supported by a number of service functions in IS-U/CSS that are designed for use in the Front Office of a utility company. „ In many cases, the business process can be carried out completely using one or more of these service functions.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Typical Uses of the CIC: Front Office Process

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-25

Front Office Processes

Sequence of steps that can be processed: z By an agent z In one step

Example: Changing bank details

Log customer contact

i n t e r n a l

„ A Front Office process is a sequence of steps that is specially designed for processing a particular business transaction.

b y

„ The lifetime of a Front Office process is limited to the lifetime of the Front Office session that initiated the process.

C S C

„ All steps in a Front Office process can be carried out by a customer service agent.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Change bank/payment data for a contract account

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-26

Identification

If necessary, execute Information service function

If necessary, initiate workflow

Supported by the SAP Workflow Management System by means of: z Pre-defined workflows (e.g. service connection processing, administration of disconnection orders)

F o r

i n t e r n a l

z Customer-specific workflows (e.g. rate changes)

„ If the business process cannot be fully processed immediately, the remaining steps of the process can be coordinated by means of a workflow.

b y

„ IS-U/CCS contains a number of standard workflows. These can be modified to meet individual requirements.

C S C

„ You can also create your own workflows.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Typical Uses of the CIC: Workflow

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-27

Using R/3 Workflow: Changing a Rate (Example)

Customer service employee

Check feasibility

Letter of notification

o n l y

Adjust contract

Sales and Distribution Billing agent

i n t e r n a l

C S C

System

Replace/change (programmable) meter

F o r

Technician

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Front Office: Enter request for quotation

I'd like to be billed in the off-peak rate.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-28

o n l y

C S C

b y

If necessary, initiate workflow

Log customer contact

IS-U/CCS Contact Management supports:

9

z The logging of CIC contacts z Automatic creation of customer contacts as the final step in Front Office processes and workflows z Manual creation of customer contacts for logging purposes

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ Customer contacts can be created, changed or displayed either directly in the Customer Interaction Center or in the menu under Utilities Industry. Customer service Create/Display/Change Customer contact.

u s e

u s e

Identification

If necessary, execute Information service function

F o r

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Typical Uses of the CIC: Customer Contact

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-29

Contact Management in Customer Service

WWWWWW

Fax

In person

z Recording of contacts resulting from: „

Personal customer service, telephone calls

„

Correspondence, fax, Internet, e-mail

o n l y

z Evaluation of contacts for: „

Comprehensive overview of customer service

„

Quality and efficiency of consulting processes Utility company

C S C

b y

Internet

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Telephone

F o r

„ Contact management in IS-U/CCS is designed to record all types of contact between the utility company and the customer. „ Customer contacts can be classified during creation according to class, type and the corresponding activity.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Letter

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-30

Customer Contact Data

General z z z

Notes

Process description z z

o n l y

z

Date, time Contact class Activity

Customer contact in IS-U

z

z

z z

User-defined text Indicator for additional documents

Additional data

Communication

C S C

b y

z

Reference to any business objects Permissibility can be set

z

In person, telephone, fax, Internet, mail, online Incoming, outgoing

z

User-defined fields E.g.: division, or company code Authorization groups

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

„ Contact classes and activities can be created according to the requirements of the utility company.

u s e

„ Contact classes are used to group customer contacts according to their general subject area. For example: information, billing, budget billing

b y

u s e

Business partner Contact partner Contact number

F o r

„ Contact activity describes the type of activity between the business partner and the utility company. For example: rates information, account information, etc.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

References z

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-31

Object Link

Create contact

Maintain business object

Specify object role

Select object

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-32

Customer overview

z Business partner z Contract account z Account balance z Budget Billing amounts z Bills

F o r

o n l y

z Historical consumption values z Contract overview

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-33

CIC: Unit Summary

z The CIC is oriented towards the needs of information-

based and operational processes z The processing interface is an efficient work

environment that provides quick access to critical information z The transparency and flexibility of the CIC provides

an optimal link to business processes z Contact management enables you to evaluate the

complete contact history of business partners

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-34

Exercises Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Topic: Using the CIC At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:

As an employee in the customer center, you must process customer inquiries quickly, completely, and correctly. This increases both customer satisfaction and efficiency at work. A sound working knowledge of the CIC will help you achieve this.

o n l y

C S C

b y

Use the CIC to carry out processes efficiently

1-1

Which four units make up the CIC? What are their tasks? Unit 1: _____________________________________________ Task:

_____________________________________________

Unit 2: _____________________________________________ Task:

u s e

u s e

•

i n t e r n a l

_____________________________________________

b y

Unit 3: _____________________________________________ Task:

_____________________________________________

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Describe the objectives and the areas of implementation of the CIC

© SAP AG

o n l y

Unit 4: _____________________________________________ Task:

_____________________________________________

IUT110

F o r

F o r

•

2-35

True or false? 1-2-1

The CIC is the initial access point for users who handle both simple and complex business processes. __________________________________________________

1-2-2

The CIC provides flexible, powerful search functions. __________________________________________________

1-2-3

The CIC dictates how the processes are handled. __________________________________________________

1-2-4

The CIC automates business processes. __________________________________________________

1-2-5

The data finder always identifies the business partner as the result of a search. __________________________________________________

To which business partner is the device with serial number TB010110## allocated? What is the address of the connection object?

i n t e r n a l

C S C

1-3

F o r

o n l y

1-2

•

Call up the data finder using the

b y

•

On the Technical data tab page, enter the serial number in the Device data area.

u s e

Proceed as follows:

•

To leave the data finder, choose Continue

•

In the CIC, choose Continue again

button

u s e

.

b y

i n t e r n a l

.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-36

1-4

Enter the address of the connection object in which the device is located: ___________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Which premises are contained in the connection object from task 1-3? Proceed as follows: In the navigation area (Environment tab page), select the premise. Choose the Connection object environment activity using the right mouse button. Premise number

Short text

o n l y

Identify all customers for the connection object in Massachusetts Avenue 0##. Which business partners live in the connection object 0## Massachusetts Avenue?

b y

1-6

Proceed as follows:

o n l y

u s e

i n t e r n a l

F o r

C S C

First and last names of business partner

Choose Mr Elmer Petersheim and complete the following table: Question

Answer

How many contract accounts are assigned to Mr Petersheim? Which types of contract does Mr Petersheim have? Which devices are assigned to Mr Petersheim?

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

Business partner no.

u s e

In the selection area, use the street of the connection object as the search criterion. Enter the street and house number. You can also only enter part of the street name, for example, Massach* (select the language key EN). Confirm your entry by selecting Continue .

i n t e r n a l

End the contact.

C S C

F o r

1-5

2-37

o n l y

1-8

From the data environment in task 1-7, save the devices belonging to the premise to the clipboard.

1-9

Display the data for the devices and complete the table below: Information

Electricity meter

Gas meter

Water meter

Serial number Device category (or material) number Description of the device category or material Division Current business partners Current device location

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Display the data environment of the premise to which contract TB010110## belongs.

F o r

1-10 How can you recognize that advanced search criteria have been entered? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

1-7

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-38

Exercises Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Topic: Customer contact management At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: •

Create various customer contacts

•

Evaluate and display customer contact history

By completely documenting all customer contacts, you will be able to provide a more efficient service to customers. The link to business objects allows you to access relevant information instantly.

Customer TB010110## reports a complaint by telephone. You record the complaint in a customer contact.

2-1-2

You provide customer TB010110## with general information which you make more specific by supplementing it with information from the object link in the customer contact. Insert contract TB010110## and contract account TB010110##.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

2-1-1

u s e

b y

Create a customer contact using the following information:

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

2-1

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-39

2-2

Display contacts 2-2-1

Display all customer contacts in the CIC for customer TB010110##. Check the list of object links. If necessary, switch to the detail display of the business object. How many and what type of contacts does the customer have? ________________ Date

Type

o n l y

C S C

Use the customer overview in the CIC to display the current customer contacts for customer TB010110##.

2-2-3

Evaluate all the customer contacts. Display all customer contacts entered with contact class 8 (complaint).

b y

2-2-2

u s e

Utilities Industry Æ Information System Æ Report Selection Æ Customer Service Æ Evaluate Customer Contacts

b y

2-3

True or false?

C S C

2-3-1

All customer contacts are always created automatically. ______________________________________________________ Customer contacts are divided into contact classes and further sub-divided into contact activities. ______________________________________________________

2-3-3

Customer contacts can only ever be displayed for one business partner at a time. ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-40

o n l y

2-3-2

u s e

To do this, use the information system. Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Action

F o r

F o r

Class

Exercises Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Topic: Master data in IS-U/CCS At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: •

Explain the central business partner model and how it is integrated in the R/3 System.

As an employee in customer services, you have been assigned to telephone service today. Some customers only wish to obtain information, but others want to have their data changed. You are using the CIC as your central working environment.

•

Use the customer overview

•

Process each step from the customer overview.

Enter the selection criteria, display the customer overview, and enter the current bank details for bank collections for the customer’s private account. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

o n l y

F o r

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Start from the CIC.

b y

3-1-1

•

u s e

u s e

b y

Customer TB010110## has two contract accounts. The following exercises are based solely on his Private Account 0##. The customer notifies you of new bank details that are to be used for bank collections for his private account.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

3-1

2-41

3-1-2

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3-1-3

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

C S C

o n l y

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Return to the CIC. 3-2

Customer TB010110## has two contract accounts. The following exercises are based solely on his Community Account 0##. The customer notifies you of new bank details that are to be used for bank collections for his community account. In the navigation area ( Environment tab page), select the contract account of customer TB010110## and call the Change bank data activity. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.

u s e

u s e

3-2-1

b y

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Enter the new bank details for the business partner and save your data. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure. ______________________________________________________

o n l y

F o r

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3-2-3

Enter the new bank details as the payment method for incoming payments in the contract account and save your data. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

3-2-2

i n t e r n a l

b y

Switch from the customer overview to change modus for the contract account, choose the private account, and enter the new bank details as the payment method for incoming payments. Save your changes. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Switch from customer overview to the change mode for the business partner, enter the new bank details, and save your data. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.

2-42

3-2-4

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3-3

Change the contract description of the residential electricity contract of the community account from the old description electricity contract 0## to the new description communal electricity contract 0##. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.

o n l y

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

b y

C S C

______________________________________________________ End the contact. 3-4

True or false? 3-4-1

Data for a business partner who is also a contract partner, installer, and contact person has to be entered more than once. ______________________________________________________

b y

3-4-2

A contract account can be assigned to several business partners.

C S C

______________________________________________________ 3-4-3

The contract account is the contract partner’s customer account.

o n l y

______________________________________________________ 3-4-4

The contract contains rate data for all divisions. ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

u s e

u s e

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Change the contract description for residential electricity contract TB010130## of the community account.

F o r

F o r

Enter a remark in the customer contact and save your data. Describe the menu paths and mouse actions you use for this procedure.

2-43

Name three different logs that are updated when master data is created or changed. List the changes for each log. To do this, use contract TB010130##. 1. __________________________________________________________ 2. __________________________________________________________ 3. __________________________________________________________

3-6

True or false? 3-6-1

______________________________________________________ 3-6-2 3-6-3

The connection object is managed as a piece of equipment in the Plant Maintenance component (PM). _____________________________________________________

3-6-4

The device location is subordinate to the connection object.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

b y

______________________________________________________

3-6-6

Individual devices are installed in the connection object. ______________________________________________________ The premise is managed as a functional location in PM. ______________________________________________________

3-6-7

u s e

u s e

The connection object can comprise one or more premises. ______________________________________________________

3-6-5

The installation groups together the measuring devices of a division and a premise for the purpose of joint billing.

b y

______________________________________________________ 3-6-8

The installation manages basic billing control parameters.

C S C

______________________________________________________

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

The connection object is always a building.

F o r

o n l y

3-5

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-44

Solutions Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Topic: Using the CIC

Unit 2:

Navigation area Task: Provide specific information in response to customer inquiries. Starts complex business processes, for example SAP Business Workflow.

Unit 3:

Application area: Task: Provides overview pages containing inbox for SAP business workflow, CIC contact management, and so on.

Unit 4:

Action box: Task: Call specific business processes.

i n t e r n a l

True. The CIC integrates both simple information and environment displays and workflow processes that are used to control comprehensive business processes.

1-2-2

True. The CIC enables you to enter a variety of information in order to find the data of a business partner. For example, you can determine a business partner by means of their name or by their device number.

1-2-3

False. The CIC is very flexible and is easily adapted and integrated with process flows for different user groups. True. It supports the user in implementing processes. True. CIC processes and workflow processes are integrated in the CIC. This means that business processes are controlled and forwarded automatically.

1-2-5

False. The data finder only identifies the business objects you were searching for. These objects must belong to a business partner.

© SAP AG

IUT110

o n l y

1-2-4

C S C

1-2-1

b y

F o r

1-2

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Identification (selection area) Task: Selection of data using flexible search criteria.

i n t e r n a l

Unit 1:

F o r

o n l y

1-1

2-45

Call the CIC. From the SAP Easy Access menu choose: Utilities Industry → Customer Service Æ Front Office/Customer Interaction Center Æ Customer Interaction Center. Activate the data finder by choosing Open the Technical Data tab page. In the Device data area, enter the serial number TB010110## in the Serial number field. Exit the data finder by choosing Select the binocular button and then again. The first time you call the data, the system searches using the selection criteria. If the system finds data that meets the search criteria, the second data call confirms the search criteria. The system then displays the data. The system displays the connection object in which the device is located. All the master data belonging to the connection object is also displayed. Select the premise in the navigation area (Environment tab page). The Choose the Connection object environment by clicking on the right mouse button. Choose Continue. Short text

TB010110##

Massachusetts Avenue 0##, Boston

TB010120##

Massachusetts Avenue 0##, Boston

1-5

Return to the CIC (F3). Choose the End contact button.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Premise number

i n t e r n a l

C S C

1-4

F o r

o n l y

1-3

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-46

1-6

In the identification area, search for the street of the connection object. Enter your search criteria. Since this connection object contains more than one business partner, all the business partners appear in the hit list. Business partner no.

First and last names of business partner

TB010110##

Elmer Petersheim

TB010120##

Constance Bishop

Choose Mr Elmer Petersheim. The data environment for the business partner is displayed. The answers are as follows: Question

Answer

How many contract accounts are assigned to Mr Petersheim?

Mr Petersheim has two contract accounts:

o n l y

C S C

b y

u s e

TB010120##

Mr Petersheim has four utility contracts: Electricity contract:

TB010110##

Gas contract:

TB010180##

Water contract:

TB010120##

Electricity contract:

TB010130##

Mr Petersheim has 3 devices: Double-rate meter for electricity: TB010110## Water meter:

TB010120##

Gas meter:

TB010180##

u s e

b y

1-7

Select the premise and choose Premise environment. From the tree structure, you can identify the following relationships:

F o r

One electricity installation contains no devices. This is a flat-rate installation that does not measure consumption or energy. Meters are allocated to all the other installations. 1-8

You are in the environment of premise TB010110##. To save all the devices in the clipboard (corresponding tab page in the navigation area), repeat the following procedure for each device: Click on the device. This selects the line. Choose To clipboard or F8. You have now added the object to the clipboard. Repeat for all devices in the premise. Once you have added all the devices to the clipboard, return to the CIC. To confirm your actions, call the Clipboard tap page in the navigation area.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-47

o n l y

Four utility installations are allocated to the tree structure: Gas, water, and two for electricity. A utility contract, contract account, and business partner is allocated to each utility installation.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Joint account:

i n t e r n a l

Which devices are assigned to Mr Petersheim?

TB010110##

F o r

Which types of contract does Mr Petersheim have?

Private account:

o n l y

On the Environment tab page of the navigation area, open the structure as far as the device level. To display a device, double click on it. You can now answer the following questions: Information

Electricity meter

Gas meter

Water meter

Serial number

TB010110##

TB010180##

TB010120##

Device category (or material) number

TD-DRA-00

TD-GA-00

TD-WA-00

Description of the device category or material

IS-U double-rate meter

IS-U gas meter

IS-U water meter

Division

01

02

03

Current business partners

TB010110##

TB010110##

TB010110##

Current device location

TB010111DL0##

TB010111DL0##

TB010111DL0##

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

1-10 Call up the data finder and select the All search criteria tab page. The button turns green when advanced selection values have been added.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

1-9

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-48

Solutions Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Topic: Customer contact management

2-1 2-1-1

Utilities Industry → Customer Service Æ Front Office/Customer Interaction Center Æ Customer Interaction Center. Select your customer. In the action box, call the Contact Create function (call group Customer).

o n l y

In the Class field, enter 8 (complaint). In the Action field, select 1 (complaint about employee).

2-1-2

Choose the action box call again.

u s e

u s e

Enter TB010110## in the contract field and choose Enter. The residential electricity contract has been added to the link list. Carry out the same procedure to add Contract account TB010110## to the link list. Save the contact.

b y

C S C

Change to the Business objects tab page. To add a link, press the Add object button. Choose an object role that refers to the Utility Contract object type. The system calls the data finder so that you can search for a specific contract.

i n t e r n a l

b y

In the Contact class field, enter 1001 Information In the Activity field enter 1001 General information provided. Enter additional text on the information in the editor’s lines.

i n t e r n a l

In the editor lines at the bottom of the screen, enter a reason for the complaint and save the contact.

F o r

C S C

Call the CIC.

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-49

2-2 2-2-1

Class

Action

Type

10.03.99

Move-in

New customer moves in

-

16.04.98

Move-in

New customer moves in

-

16.04.98

Move-in

New customer moves in

-

Today’s date

Complaint

Unfriendly employee

Today’s date

Information

General information provided

In the action box, call the Customer overview (call group Information). The most recent customer contacts are listed in the center table. By double-clicking on the individual customer contacts, you activate the detail display.

2-2-3

From the SAP Easy Access menu choose:

b y

2-2-2

u s e

Utilities Industry Æ Information System Æ Report Selection Æ Customer Service Æ Evaluate Customer Contacts

False. Customer contacts can also be created manually. The system creates the CIC contact automatically. To stop the customer contact being created, deactivate the contact log.

2-3-2

True.

2-3-3

False. The information system can analyze all customer contacts according to different criteria.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-50

o n l y

2-3-1

C S C

2-3

b y

Enter the following search criteria: Contact class: 8 (Complaint). Choose Execute or F8. All contacts relating to complaints are displayed. Return to the CIC.

u s e

i n t e r n a l

Date

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

You can configure the system to display customer contacts in the application area; in the Customer overview tab page. The following contacts exist:

F o r

F o r

In the navigation area choose the Documents tab page. Choose Refresh. This gives you a list of all customer contacts for this customer. Double-clicking on the individual lines displays detailed information on the customer contact.

Unit: Customer Interaction Center (CIC) Topic: Master Data in IS-U/CCS

3-1 3-1-1

Double-click on the account Private Account 0##. This brings you to the master data display of the contract account. Switch to the Payments/Taxes tab page. In the data area Incoming Payments you can read the bank details for incoming payments in the field Bank details ID. Return to the customer overview. 3-1-2

Place the cursor in the address field of the business partner. Choose Change or F5. This brings you to the master data change screen for the business partner.

C S C

b y

3-1-3

In the ID field, enter the key GIRO . In the Cntry field, enter the key US. In the Bank key field, enter a bank sort code using F4. In the Bank acct field, enter an account number. Save your changes. You have now entered the new bank details for the business partner. Select F3 to return to the customer overview. Position the cursor on Private Account 0##. Choose Change contract account. This brings you to the master data change screen of the contract account. Switch to the Payment/Taxes tab. Enter the new bank details for incoming payments.

u s e

Switch to the Payment transactions tab page. Enter the new bank details.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Save your changes. You have now defined new bank details for incoming payments and have returned to the customer overview. Return to the CIC.

b y

Under Incoming payments, enter GIRO in the Bank details Id field. Doubleclick the Bank Details ID field. The new bank details are displayed (doubleclicking refreshes the screen).

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Once you have identified the customer, call the Customer overview (call group Information).

F o r

o n l y

Solutions

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-51

In the navigation area, select the second contract account. Call the Change bank data activity using the right mouse button.

3-2-2

This brings you to the business partner to record the new bank details. Switch to the Payment Transactions tab page. Now enter the new bank details. To do this, enter the key GEM in the ID field. In the Cntry field, enter the key US. In the Bank key field, enter a bank using F4. Enter an account number in the Bank acct field. Save your changes. You have now entered new bank details for the business partner and select F3 to return to the previously chosen contract account.

C S C

3-3

3-2-3

Switch to the Payment/Taxes tab page. In the ID field, enter the key GEM . Double-click the Bank Details ID field. The new bank details are displayed (double-clicking refreshes the screen). Save your changes. You have now defined new bank details for incoming payments.

3-2-4

In the last step, you created a customer contact. Enter a comment in the editor lines at the bottom of the screen and save the changes.

In the navigation area, select the contract and choose the Change contract activity. Enter the new description Community electricity contract 0## in the Text Contract field. Save the changes and return to the CIC.

i n t e r n a l

False. In IS-U/CCS, the contract account is configured in such a way that it can only be allocated to a single business partner. However, a business partner can have several contract accounts.

However: When you customize the contract account category, you can define the contract account so that it can be allocated to several business partners. 3-4-3

True. The contract account is a structure that allows the billing of posting data for contracts or benefit types that have the same collections/disbursements agreements. A customer account is managed for a contract account.

3-4-4

False. The contract is an agreement between a business partners and utility company which applies to a particular division. The contract contains control data for billing, the generation of budget billing plans, and for managing contract accounts receivable and payable. The rate data is stored in the installation and in the installation structure.

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-52

o n l y

F o r

3-4-2

C S C

False. You can use the SAP business partner model to assign different roles to a business partner. Only role-specific data that was not entered previously has to be added.

b y

3-4-1

u s e

u s e

3-4

i n t e r n a l

b y

3-2-1

F o r

o n l y

3-2

3-5

Enter the business partner key in the data finder and identify the business partner data. Double-click on contract TB010130## to display the master data. Here, the following three logs are located under the Extras menu: 1) Creation data 2) Field changes 3) Contract changes

3-6-2

True.

3-6-3

False. The connection object is at the top of the hierarchy of functional locations.

3-6-4

True. Device locations are modeled as functional locations in the PM component and the connection object is the higher-level concept.

3-6-5

C S C

False. Devices are installed in device locations and are therefore indirectly allocated to a connection object.

3-6-6

False. The premise is used exclusively in IS-U/CCS to group together installations of different divisions.

3-6-7

True. Devices, registers, and fixed payment billing factors, which are to be jointly billed, are grouped together and assigned to a premise. A premise can contain several installations. These can refer to the same or to different divisions.

3-6-8

True. The billing class and rate category are allocated to the installation. These influence how billing runs.

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

u s e

o n l y

False. A connection object can also be a piece of property, a well, or a building site.

F o r

3-6-1

b y

3-6

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

2-53

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

2-54

IUT110

© SAP AG

Move-In/Out

Contents: z The business processes move-in, move-out, and move-in/out z Effects on both the business and technical master data

o n l y

F o r

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

b y

„ You can enter all the data required for moving in or out using the pre-defined transactions move-in, move-out, and move-in/out. This enables you to process the whole transaction immediately, including sending the bill to the customer moving out and a welcome letter to the customer moving in.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-1

Move-In/Out: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the business processes move-in, moveout, and move-in/out. z Implement the business processes move-in, moveout, and move-in/out from the Customer Interaction Center (CIC) z Explain the changes to the master data

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-2

Move In/Out: Business Scenario

z A customer reports a move-in. z You carry out the move-in in the CIC as follows: „

Check if the customer is an existing business partner

„

Enter the premise and move-in date

„

Enter and check the personal data

„

Check the meter reading results

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-3

Move-In Definition

Move-in Business partner

z At move-in, a contract is concluded for each installation selected at a premise

Contract account

Contract

o n l y

F o r

C S C

b y

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

„ You can use move-in processing to make a contract billable. Payment requests levied at the start of supply and a welcome letter can also be triggered from the move-in.

b y

„ You can use the move-in to execute a large number of activities that are required to create the business partner supply. You can create business master data or change existing data. In particular, you can allocate a contract to an installation.

u s e

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Installation

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-4

z The following technical master data must be entered before move-in: „

Connection object

„

Premise

„

Installation

Premise

C S C

z The device can be installed before move-in, but this is not a prerequisite.

Installation

i n t e r n a l

Device Device  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Connection object

F o r

o n l y

Move-In: Prerequisites

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-5

Move-In: Business Master Data

Î Should be re-used for existing customers

Contract account

Î Can be re-used for existing customers

Contract

Î Is created during move-in

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Business partner

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-6

Customer visit/call

Contract Bank details 1 1 Payment method 1 Alternative payer .... 1 FI-CA document 3 FI-CA document

Move-in complete

Move-in Customer moves in

Move-in

July

31 BB

Mrs. Smith

Move-In/Out

amount $250

Business partner, account

C S C

b y

u s e

Welcome letter

Meter reading

Budget billing plan

Customer contact

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ Essential steps for move-in • Identify premise

b y

• Identify or create customer

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Security

i n t e r n a l

• Select contract account and edit or create account, as necessary • Create contract „ Optional steps for move-in

o n l y

F o r

Contract Validation

F o r

o n l y

The Move-In Process

• Add contact data • Prepare and carry out move-in meter reading • Record results of move-in meter reading • Maintain rate data • Check whether the billing structure can be billed • Manually maintain creditworthiness or result of automatic creditworthiness calculation. • Request cash security deposit • Create budget billing plan • Create welcome letter

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-7

Move-In: The IS-U House

Connection object

Apartment 1 = Premise Contract Contract 1: 1: Electricity Electricity

Contract Contract account account

C S C

Service Connection: Water

Installation Installation 2: 2:

Apartment 3 Device Device location location Hall Hall

Apartment 2 Gas Gas meter meter Installation Installation 3: 3: Water Water meter meter

Service Connection: Gas

Device Device location location Basement Basement

Basement

Service Connection: Electricity

Supply grid

i n t e r n a l

Street

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Contract Contract 3: 3: Water Water

Electricity Electricity meter meter

Hall

F o r

o n l y

Business partner

Contract Contract 2: 2: Gas Gas

Installation Installation 1: 1:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-8

Move-Out: Business Scenario

z A customer reports a move-out z You carry out the move-out in the CIC as follows: „

Identify the customer

„

Enter the move-out date

„

Maintain the personal data (new address)

„

Create a meter reading order

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-9

The Move-Out Process

Final meter Customer reports Contract Move-out reading results confirmation move-out

X Contract Bank deta ils 1

1 Payment method 1 Alternative payer .... 1 FI-CA document 3 FI-CA docum ent

Move-out

X

Customer moves-out

o n l y

July

31 BB amount $250

Budget billing plan

Final billing

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Contact data

i n t e r n a l

„ Essential steps for move-out • Identify and choose customer and contract

b y

• Enter move-out date

C S C

i n t e r n a l

F o r

• Enter final meter reading results „ Optional steps for move-out • Add contact data

o n l y

F o r

Move-out complete

• Edit the customer moving out and the contract account • Prepare and carry out final meter reading • Carry out final billing immediately and print and issue final invoice • Create move-out confirmation „ IS-U will do the following for you: • Terminate contracts • Stop any budget billing collection • Suspend any current dunning procedure • Change any dunning procedures that may affect open items

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-10

Move In/Out: Business Scenario

z A new customer reports a move-in and the moveout of the previous customer

„

Check if the new customer is already a business partner

„

Enter premise and move-in/out date

„

Enter and check the personal data

„

Enter the meter reading results

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z You carry out the move-in/-out in the CIC as follows:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-11

The Move-In/Out Process

Move-out

Move-in

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Tran spor t

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-12

Options in Move-In/Out Processing

z

Business partner

z

Premise

z

Move-out date

z

z

New premise

z

z

Move-in date

Move-out date Business partner or classification of the new business partner Move-in date

z

Call in CIC X

Front Office: Initial Screen Front office Edit Goto System Help

o n l y

Context

Proces ses

Search criteria Name: last/first Street/house number PostCd/city/cntry

Addr.Cat. Bus. part. Conn.obj.

Business partner Activity date

Tel. no.

Information Environment Call Description

C S C

b y

Move-in/out for premise

Change

i n t e r n a l

Processes

Call Description

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Move-in/out for business partner

F o r

„ In the move-in/out transaction, you have the following processing options: • Move-in/out for premise.You can process the move-out or move-in of two different business partners into one premise.

b y

• Business partner move-in/out You can process a business partner's move-out from a premise as well as his/her move-in to another premise

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Parameters

Parameters

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-13

Move-In: Master Data Business master data

Technical master data

Business partner

Connection object

Contract account

Premise

o n l y

Installation

b y

Device  SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ Technical and business master data are connected during a move-in.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Move-in

F o r

Contract

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-14

No Changes to Installation Data

01.02.2003

Move-in

Customer 1

Customer 2

Move-out Move-in

Contract Contract 22

Contract Contract 11

02. Nov.

02. Dec

03. Jan.

03. Feb.

03. Mar.

03.Apr

03. May

o n l y

F o r

C S C

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

i n t e r n a l

Installation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-15

Installation History

Installation 10815 01.01.90 - 14.08.1992

Terminated contract 10004711

15.08.92 - 31.03.1993

No contract assigned

01.04.93 - 16.12.1996

Terminated contract 10004713

17.12.97 - 31.12.9999

Current contract 10004714

o n l y

F o r

C S C

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

i n t e r n a l

Information on the installation's data environment

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-16

Move-In/Out: Unit Summary

You are now able to: z Describe the business processes move-in, moveout, and move-in/out. z Implement the business processes move-in, move-out, and move-in/out from the Customer Interaction Center (CIC) z Explain the changes to the master data

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-17

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

3-18

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Move-In/Out Topic: Move-In At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Perform the full move-in process in the system • Display the move-in document generated. A customer comes in person to the service center and informs you that she would like a utility contract for an apartment that is currently vacant.

o n l y

u s e

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Choose Environment Æ Data, and answer the following question: Which installations from Mrs. Bishop’s new apartment are found in this premise? Enter them in the following table: Installation number

Division

Return to the CIC.

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-19

o n l y

Identify the new premise Mrs. Bishop requires utility contracts for her new apartment 0## East Side Highway. Identify the premise into which Mrs. Bishop is moving. (Once you have done this, you should be able to access the premise from the clipboard). Execute the Identify premise call that is located in the Identify call group (action box). In the Data Finder, choose the Technical data tab page and enter the street and house number in the connection object area. Choose Save Enter. If the system can determine a premise, it is displayed in the navigation area on the Clipboard tab page. Select the entry and display the object (right mouse click - Display). Enter the number of the premise here: _____________

C S C

1-1-2

b y

Identify the customer The customer tells you her name is Constance Bishop. At the moment, she lives in Massachusetts Avenue 0## in 02100, Boston. Identify the customer in the system. Once you have done this, the business partner should be available in the CIC.

u s e

1-1-1

b y

C S C

A business partner moves in to a premise.

i n t e r n a l

1-1

F o r

You use the CIC to perform the move-in, with today’s date as the start date.

1-1-3

Perform the move-in. To do this, execute the M/in: known customer call under the Move I/O call group in the action box Perform the move-in from the CIC . Use the business objects that you saved to the clipboard. Select both entries. The system prompts you to maintain the move-in date in an additional step in the CIC (specify move-in parameters). Enter today’s date. •

When you are asked, Do you want to adopt an existing contract account?, answer No

•

Perform the move-in for all the installations in the premise.

o n l y

•

Bank data tab page Since Mrs. Bishop has confirmed that she will continue to use the same account, you do not need to make any changes here.

•

Payment data tab page Check that the payment method entered is correct. Mrs Bishop has agreed that any credit may be transferred to her bank account. Change the outgoing payment method accordingly.

•

Contracts tab page Enter the following values in the new contracts:

u s e

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Electricity East Side Highway 0##

02

Gas - East Side Highway 0##

03

Water - East Side Highway 0##

o n l y

01

C S C

Contract text

•

Tab page Meter Reading Data Check if meter readings already exist If not, estimate them. Therefore, use the Select All button to select all the registers and choose Estimate.

•

Save the move-in.

IUT110

b y

© SAP AG

Division

u s e

To switch between the contracts, activate the Electricity, Gas and Water tab pages.

i n t e r n a l

b y

Name/Admin. tab page In the contact data, record the fact that Mrs. Bishop came by in person.

F o r

•

C S C

You are now in the move-in processing screen.

3-20

o n l y

C S C

______________________________________________________

1-2

1-1-5

Customer overview Display the customer overview for Constance Bishop. Note that the premise is visible in the lower part of the screen.

1-1-6

Customer environment Display the customer environment for Constance Bishop.

True or false? 1-2-1

The move-in is a workflow process ______________________________________________________

1-2-2

A move-in connects the contracts of a business partner to the installations of a premise. ______________________________________________________

1-2-3

The installation contains the move-in date. ______________________________________________________ During move-in, a business partner and his/her contract accounts and contracts must already exist in the system.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

______________________________________________________

u s e

1-2-4

i n t e r n a l

b y

Display the current business partner data. Choose Refresh in the navigation area (Environment tab page). The system displays the new data you have created. In the Documents tab page of the navigation area, choose Refresh. A new contact exists. Display this contact (double click on the object) and choose the Business Objects tab page. Here you can find the move-in document. Display this document and make a note of the document number:

F o r

u s e

1-1-4

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-21

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

3-22

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Move-In/Out Topic: Move-Out At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Perform the full move-out process in the system • Display the move-out document generated. A customer telephones and informs you that she is moving out at the end of the month.

Business partner move-out 2-1-1

Identify the customer Sarah Peterson lives in Massachusetts Avenue 1##, 02116 Boston Identify the customer in the system. Once you have executed this step, the business partner should be available in the clipboard

2-1-2

Obtain an overview of the data environment of Mrs Peterson. To do this, go to the action box and choose either the Customer Environment or Customer Overview call. How many contract accounts does she have?

b y

b y

2-1

u s e

C S C

In addition, request a meter reading order.

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

u s e

F o r

o n l y

Perform the move-out from the CIC and enter the customer’s new address.

C S C

___________________________ How many supply contracts? ___________________________

o n l y

F o r

Complete the following table (with the corresponding key values): Division

Contract

Installation

Are there any outstanding receivables for Mrs Smith’s account? ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-23

2-1-3

Perform move-out Perform the move-out from the CIC (Business partner move-out). Use the Business partner Sarah Peterson business object that has been saved in the clipboard. •

Move-out date

Last day of the current month

Address data tab page Enter Mrs Peterson’s new address: Independence Avenue 0##, 02116 Boston. •

MR data tab page Create a meter reading order for the meters.

•

Save the move-out, return to the CIC and refresh the data.

...

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-24

Exercises Unit: Move-In/Out Topic: Move-In/Out At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Perform a move-in/out in the system • Display related documents • Understand the move-in/out data environment Harry Jones moves into the premise Constitution Avenue 0##, 02116 Boston.

3-1

Move-in/move-out of a premise

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Title

Mr

Category

Person

Sex

Male

Last name

Jones

First name

Harry0##

Street

Constitution Avenue

Number

0##

Post code

02116

City

Boston

Country

US

IUT110

o n l y

Value

C S C

Field name

b y

© SAP AG

Identify the new customer Find out if Harry0## Jones is already a customer. Harry Jones does not exist. Create the business partner in the selection area. To do this, choose the Create button and maintain the following data:

u s e

u s e

b y

3-1-1

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Mr Jones reports the move-out and his subsequent move-in, and provides the meter readings for all the registers.

F o r

o n l y

The previous tenant moved out of the premise today.

3-25

Choose Save Enter. You can now attempt to identify Mr Jones again (press Enter twice) 3-1-2

Identify the premise and its environment •

Identify the premise Constitution Avenue 0##, 02116 Boston Use the Connection Object Environment call in the Information call group in the action box.

•

Find out who was previously registered as a business partner at that address. Business partner number: ________________________________ Name: ________________________________________________

•

Select the premise and choose Copy to Clipboard or F8.

Do this from the CIC (Premise move-in/out). Use the business partner Harry 0# Jones and Premise 0## Constitution Avenue in Boston, MA 02129 business objects from the clipboard. You are on the initial move-in/out screen. You can check the dates here (such as move-in or move-out date). Choose Save Enter.

u s e

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Move-out Meter reading data tab page Estimate all meter readings.

•

Move-out: Save the move-out.

You are now in move-in processing.

© SAP AG

•

Move-in: Bank data tab page Mr Jones has account number 08154711## at the Mellon Bank in Boston (under ID 1).

•

Move-in: Payment data tab page Mr Jones agrees to a direct debit and would like any credit balances to be transferred to this account.

•

Move-in: Meter reading data tab page Log the meter reading data. Have the move-out meter readings been transferred? What is the meter reading type?

•

Save the move-in.

IUT110

3-26

o n l y

•

C S C

Move-out: Address data tab page Enter Mrs Smith’s new address: 0## Apple Tree Lane in Washington D.C.

b y

•

u s e

You are now in move-out processing.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Perform the move-in/out

b y

3-1-3

F o r

o n l y

To enable each group to carry out the exercise, please attach your group number to the end of the first name. As a result, search for Harry(0##) Jones later.

3-1-4

Data environment for the premise following move-in/out Display the premise environment. Which new contracts were created? Division

•

Contract

Installation

Switch the view from today’s data to a view, which comprises the data for a particular period (for example 01/01/1998 to tomorrow). Note that the contracts for the premise’s installations can be displayed historically.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-27

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

3-28

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Move-In/Out Topic: Move-In

1-1

Business partner moves in to a premise Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center 1-1-1

Identify the customer

C S C

b y

Field name

Value

Last name

Bishop or Bish*

First name

Constance or Co*

Street

Massachusetts Avenue or M*

House number

0##

Post code

02100 or initial value

City

Boston or initial entry

•

The business partner identified is now also displayed in the clipboard.

b y

i n t e r n a l

Choose Enter until the data is displayed in the navigation area.

u s e

•

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Enter the following data in the search criteria:

F o r

o n l y

•

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-29

1-1-2

Identify the new premise. •

•

Enter the following data in the search criteria (tab page: Technical Data): Field name

Value

Street

East Side Highway or Ea*

House number

0##

The premise required is now in the clipboard (Clipboard tab page in the navigation area).

To display the desired premise information: Select the premise in the clipboard and choose the Display call via right mouse click.

•

In the premise display, choose Environment Æ Data.

•

The number of the premise is TB060110##.

C S C

TB060110##

Electricity

TB060120##

Water

TB060170##

Gas

Return to the Customer Interaction Center (using the F3 function key).

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Division

i n t e r n a l

•

Installation number

F o r

o n l y

•

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-30

•

The business partner line on the clipboard is selected.

•

Select the premise line.

•

Choose the M/in: known customer call under the Move I/O call group.

•

Enter today’s date in the move-in date field. Choose Execute or F8.

•

When you are asked, Do you want to adopt an existing contract account?, answer no.

•

Confirm that you want to perform the move-in for all three installations on the premise by pressing Enter or the green checkmark.

•

Name/Administration: Contact data tab page The personal visit of Mrs Bishop to the customer center is saved under contact type. Using field selection (F4), choose the value Personal.

•

Payment data tab page Value

Outgoing payment. method

B

Bank ID – outgoing

1

Electricity - East Side Highway 0##

02

Gas - East Side Highway 0##

03

Water - East Side Highway 0##

• 1-1-4

Display the business partner data. •

1-1-6

© SAP AG

Proceed as described in the exercise.

o n l y

1-1-5

Save the move-in.

C S C

F o r

01

b y

Contract text

u s e

Division

u s e

Contracts tab page

i n t e r n a l

b y

•

Field name

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Perform the move-in

F o r

o n l y

1-1-3

Customer overview •

Choose Customer overview from the Information call group.

•

Return to the Customer Interaction Center.

Customer environment •

Choose Customer environment from the Information call group.

•

Return to the Customer Interaction Center.

IUT110

3-31

1-2

True or false? 1-2-1

False, since all steps can by carried out by one employee at the same time and without interruption.

1-2-2

True.

1-2-3

False, move-in and move-out dates are managed in the contract. However, the installation is assigned to a contract after move-in.

1-2-4

False. During move-in, a new business partner can be added and the contracts and contract account created.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-32

Solutions Unit: Move-In/Out Topic: Move-Out

2-1

Business partner moves out Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center 2-1-1

Identify the customer

C S C

b y

u s e

Last name

Peterson or Pe*

First name

Sarah

Street

Massachusetts Avenue

House number

1##

Post code

02116 or initial value

City

Boston or initial entry

Choose Enter until the data is available in the navigation area.

•

The business partner identified is now also found in the clipboard.

u s e

Navigation area: Customer overview and customer environment. •

Return to the Customer Interaction Center.

•

How many contract accounts does Mrs Peterson have?

•

No. of contract accounts

Contract account number

1

TB010140##

How many supply accounts does Mrs Peterson have? Division

Contract

Installation

Electricity

TB010160##

TB010160##

Water

TB010170##

TB010170##

Are there any outstanding receivables for Mrs Peterson’s account?

IUT110

o n l y

F o r

Choose Customer environment from the Information call group.

C S C

•

b y

i n t e r n a l

Value

•

•

© SAP AG

Field name

i n t e r n a l

2-1-2

Enter the following data in the search criteria:

F o r

o n l y

•

2

Yes.

3-33

•

The business partner line on the clipboard is selected.

•

Choose Move-out partner under the Move I/O call group.

•

Enter the move-out date

•

Maintain your data on the Management/Name and Address Data tab pages. Field name

Values

Street

Independence Avenue

House no.

0##

Post Code

02116

City

Boston

•

Tab page Meter reading data Activate the indicator service notif/order

•

Save the move-out.

•

Return to the CIC.

•

Update the Environment and Documents tab pages in the navigation area.

b y

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Perform the move-out

F o r

o n l y

2-1-3

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-34

Solutions Unit: Move-In/Out Topic: Move-In/Out

3-1

Move-in/out of a premise Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center 3-1-1

Identify the new customer

C S C

b y

Last name

Jones

First name

Harry0##

Search results: Using the specified selections, no object from category Business partner was found.

•

Create the business partner.

•

Choose Enter until the data for the new business partner created appears in the clipboard.

Identify the premise and its environment

Name

TB000110##

Ashley Smith

C S C

Business partner

b y

•

Proceed as described in the exercise.

u s e

u s e

Value

•

•

i n t e r n a l

Field name

i n t e r n a l

3-1-2

Enter the following data in the search criteria:

F o r

o n l y

•

Return to the Customer Interaction Center.

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-35

3-1-3

Perform a move-in/out for a premise. •

Select both objects from the clipboard.

•

Choose the Premise move-in/out call that is found under the Move I/O call group. You can correct any data here if necessary.

•

You start move-in/out processing by pressing Enter.

•

Move-out: Address data tab page Values

Street

Apple Tree Lane

House no.

0##

Post Code

12345

City

Washington DC

Move-out: MR data tab page

F o r

o n l y

•

Field name

Select all registers

b y

Save the move-out document.

•

The system switches to process the move-in.

•

Move-in: Bank data tab page

i n t e r n a l

1

Country

US

Bank key

083000108

Bank account

08154711##

Move-in: Payment data tab page Field name

Values

Incoming payment. method

D (Direct debit)

Bank details ID

1

Outgoing payment. method

B (Outgoing paym./bank transfer)

Bank ID – outgoing

1

•

Move-in: MR Data tab page The meter reading type is 04 (derived meter reading).

•

Save the move-in document.

IUT110

o n l y

F o r

ID

C S C

© SAP AG

Values

b y

•

Field name

u s e

u s e

•

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Choose the Estimate button.

3-36

3-1-4

The data environment of the premise after the move-in/out •

New contracts Division

•

Contract

Installation

Internally assigned contract number

TB000110##

Internally assigned contract number

TB000120##

Data environment from 01/01/1998 – to date Press the button Period F7 and enter 01/01/1998 in the Valid from field.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

3-37

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

3-38

IUT110

© SAP AG

Work Management

Contents: z Technical objects in Work Management z Service orders and service objects z Service products z Interfaces to external systems

o n l y

F o r

„ In a utility company a large number of work orders are accepted, planned, calculated, carried out and if necessary, billed to a customer. IS-U uses functions which already exist in the various components of the SAP standard system to manage these orders. These functions are merged with IS-U-specific business processes in Work Management and a large number of industry-specific functions are added.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-1

Work Management: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the tasks of Work Management z Describe service order functions z Use service orders in utilities industry processes z Describe how you can offer services as products z List the most important interface of Work Management

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-2

What Areas does Work Management Cover? z Acquisition, planning, calculation, execution of internal and external work orders z Creation of bills for customers

„

Energy consulting

„

Unscheduled meter reading

„

Disconnection and reconnection

„

Maintenance

„

Repairs

„

Installation, extension or removal of technical equipment

„ The day to day business of a utility company includes processing a large number of work orders. The orders must be accepted, planned, calculated, executed and when necessary, billed to a customer.

b y

„ There are two different types of work orders; internal work orders and external work orders (which relate to Customer Service). External work orders are mapped with service orders in the Customer Service (CS) component. Internal work orders are mapped with plant maintenance orders of the Customer Service (CS) component.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Creation and extension of service connections

i n t e r n a l

„

F o r

o n l y

z Examples:

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-3

Utility Management Services Work Management can be used for offering the following services: Typical services for private / commercial customers in the areas of ...... ..

C S C

Plant Plant management management

Grid Grid services services

Distribution •• Power Power distribution distribution •• Installation Installation •• Electricity Electricity supply supply •• Meter Meter reading reading

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Plant Plant servicing servicing

Transmission

F o r

o n l y

Generation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-4

Work Management: Technical Objects

z Technical Objects in Work Management z Service orders and service objects z Service products z Interfaces to external systems

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-5

Overview of Technical Objects

Description:

Description:

Technical objects in transmission and distribution

Technical objects with a direct reference to customers

z

Transformer substations

z

Transmission lines

z

Transformer stations

z z

Example: z

Connection object

z

Premise

z

Device location

Transformers

z

Devices

Switching stations

z

Technical Installation

Plant Maintenance PM/CS

Customer Service ISIS-U

F o r

o n l y

Example:

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Technical objects in the supply area

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-6

Supply Grid Pylons (equip.) Distribution Distribution station station ST ST 435 435 (Funct. (Funct. location) location) Field Field Field Field 01 02 01 02

Line Line no. no. 186 186 (Funct. (Funct. location) location)

Field Field 03 03

Field Field 01 01 Line Line no. no. 187 187 (Funct. (Funct. location) location)

Field Field 02 02

Field Field 03 03 Line Line no. no. 188 188

Transformer Transformer fields fields Line Line no. no. 189 189

o n l y

Field Field 01 01

Object connection used to connect two systems with different hierarchies Line network with subsections

Field Field 02 02

Distribution station with transformer fields

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Field Field 03 03

F o r

Distribution Distribution station station ST ST 768 768  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Distribution Distribution station station ST ST 571 571

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-7

Connection object

Connection obj. (func. loc.) Premise Technical installation (equipment)

Premise

o n l y

Connection (equipment)

Device loctn (func. loc.)

0716192

F o r

Transformer (equipment)

0716192

0539802

0539802

125.256.01

125.256.01

Devices (equipment)

„ The technical installation is division-dependent. „ A maximum of one technical installation can be created for each division in each premise. An equipment is created in PM automatically.

b y

„ The IS-U process 'inspections' enables you to regularly maintain technical installations.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-8

Work Management: Service Orders and Objects

z Technical Objects in Work Management z Service orders and service objects z Service products z Interfaces to external systems

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-9

Services Premise

Domestic installation services Damage repairs House installation checks (inspections) Device services (installation, removal, replacement)

Aperiodic meter reading Disconnection / reconnection

C S C

b y

u s e

ON

Other on-site services  SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ The reference points of the services are: • Connection object

b y

• Device location

C S C

i n t e r n a l

OFF

i n t e r n a l

• Device • Technical Installation „ The creation of service orders is integrated in the IS-U processes. This includes:

o n l y

F o r

Maintenance of appliances

F o r

o n l y

me te rea r no: ding 32 : __ 4561 ___ _

• Aperiodic meter readings • Disconnection and reconnection • Device replacement • Inspections

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-10

Basic Structure of a Work Order

Order header

Material list

o n l y

Production resources

For example: Protective clothing, crane, traffic light, fire extinguisher, signs, excavator

Billing rule

C S C

b y

For example: materials, quantities, units of measure, storage location, batch, item category, availability

Costs (planned/actual)  SAP AG 2003

C S C

„ The object list contains functional locations, equipment, assemblies, maintenance notifications, and/or materials with serial numbers. A single object can be entered in the order header as a reference object. In the object list, several objects can be entered.

o n l y

„ Processes are used to describe the work to be carried out according to the order (the process includes e.g. the work center, the time required and the control key). „ Materials are spare parts that are needed and used to execute the order. „ Production resources (e.g. tools, protective clothing, and special heavy goods vehicles) are also needed to execute the order, but are not actually used in the order. „ The data in the billing rule states who is usually responsible for the costs. The data is taken from the master record of the reference object. It can, however, be changed during the first steps of the billing process for the order. „ The cost data informs you of the estimated costs, as well as the planned and actual costs of the order, the relevant cost categories for the order, the updating of key figures in the PMIS with value categories, and the updating of these key figures with actual costs.

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

„ Header data is information used to identify and administer maintenance orders. This information applies to the whole order. Examples of header data are the order number, description, order type, dates for order execution, priority, the person who created the order and the person who last changed it.

u s e

u s e

For example: Work center, control key, description, standard time, activity type, wages

Processes

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Equipment (assembly) Functional locations Maintenance notifications

Object list

F o r

F o r

For example: Order type, dates, plant, reference object, priority, description

4-11

Sequence of Order Processing

Entry/notification Entry/notification Planning Planning Release Release Printout Printout Execution Execution Confirmation Confirmation

Invoicing Invoicing

For service orders only

Billing Billing

u s e

b y

C S C

Commercial Commercial completion completion  SAP AG 2003

„ Processing starts when a customer or employee reports an outage, disruption or other request (such as a modification request). An order can be created directly or on the basis of a notification.

b y

„ Typical planning tasks include defining work processes, reserving replacement parts or defining working hours.

o n l y

„ Execution includes obtaining replacement parts from the stock and actually executing the order. „ Once work is complete, the actual times required to complete the work are recorded. Other technical information is also entered to document repairs and define the status of the technical system. The order is then billed in Controlling. „ Billing is performed prior to invoicing for a service order and a bill is created for the customer.

IUT110

C S C

„ The order is then transferred for scheduling and control. Availability is checked, capacity required is provided and the necessary shop papers are printed.

© SAP AG

u s e

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

F o r

F o r

o n l y

Technical Technical completion completion

4-12

Order Creation with a Service Object

Description of work to be done Resources, material... External resources

Functional location Equipment Technical object

Task list

Service object

Maint. / service order

Config.

o n l y

F o r

C S C

b y

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ The service object is used for the standardized and effective creation of maintenance and service orders.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Characteristics Values Dependencies

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-13

Example for a Service Object: Device Repair

Customer complains about a faulty device

Agent selects the service object in the CIC

o n l y

F o r

C S C

b y

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ In the CIC you can trigger the generation of a repair order by first selecting the customer and starting the process.

b y

„ You select the corresponding technical object from the displayed customer overview screen. „ The repair order is automatically created.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Service order, task list, resources and material are sent to the technician

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-14

o n l y

Workplace Planning horizon: Standard Required capacity: 60 min. Time

2.12.2002

3.12.2002

4.12.2002

5.12.2002

X

8:00 - 9:00

80 / 120

60 / 120

120 / 120

9:00 - 10:00

60 / 120

0 / 120

0 / 120

60 / 120

10:00 - 11:00

80 / 120

60 / 120

80 / 120

0 / 120

11:00 - 12:00

120 / 120

60 / 120

0 / 120

0 / 120

13:00 - 14:00

0 / 120

60 / 120

80 / 120

0 / 120

X

120 / 120

X

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Schedule appointment

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Appointment Scheduling in the CIC

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-15

Work Management: Service Products

z Technical Objects in Work Management z Service orders and service objects z Service products z Interfaces to external systems

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-16

Service Product: Concept

Description of work to be done Resources, material... External resources

Technical object Task list Service product Service material

o n l y

Config.

C S C

b y

Service order

i n t e r n a l

Characteristics Values Dependencies

Sales view Price information  SAP AG 2003

b y

„ IS-U uses the customer order from the application component Sales and Distribution (SD) and Customer Service (CS) to process customer-related business transactions. These documents are connected via a service product. The service product is a service that is sold in SD and rendered in CS.

u s e

u s e

Customer order

F o r

C S C

„ The system transfers the task list and the technical object to the service order. You can use the configuration to individually define and analyze the task list. You can also use it to influence the price of the service product.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Connection object Device....

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-17

o n l y

Service material

Task list 1. Dig trench Time: 0.5h per m Tool: Excavator

Configuration Cable per m

60.00

Trench per m

150.00

Ground:

Light

Connection box Category A 1200.00 Category B 1500.00

Length:

10m

BB amount for own contribution 300.00

Own Contribution

Characteristics Values

Connection Category: A Yes

2. Only secure excavation if soil is loose 3. Lay cable Material: X m cable 4. Install connection box Time: 1h Material: Connection box 5. Fill trench Time: 0.2 h per m

Quotation, Quotation, customer customer order order

Service Service object object

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Service Service product product

F o r

Service Service Order Order

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Service Product: Create Service Connection

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-18

The Installation Services Process

Customer 1

3

4

Front Office

UTILITY BILL P .O. #:

Customer Qty Shi ppe d

Wo r k f l o w

SD Quotation request

2

Quotation

Order

P r ice

Total

Qty Or der ed

5

o n l y

6

PM/CS 7

C S C

b y

Management

Premise

Description

DATE

S ALES P ERS ON

To tal S ubt otal Sales Tax

Invoicing request

9

Invoicing: Installation services

Work order

8

IS-U/CCS Invoicing: Installation Supply services

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

10

F o r

„ A service connection could be processed as follows: (1) A customer requests a quotation for the installation of a service connection The Customer Service Representative identifies the customer in the CIC or creates the corresponding customer master record (if the customer is not already defined in the system).

b y

(2) The agent creates a customer quotation based on a service product in the component sales and distribution (SD).

C S C

i n t e r n a l

FI-CA

IS-U/CCS

OR

(3) A quotation is created and sent to the customer A service order is automatically generated in the background in the CS component (6). (4) The customer accepts the quotation. (5) The agent generates a sales order. The order items can be automatically transferred from the quotation. (6) A service order is automatically created in the background (if this did not already happen during quotation creation (3)) (7) The service connection is laid. (8) If the service is invoiced according to consumption (i.e. if the actual costs incurred are to be billed), a billing request is created in the SD component. (9) In the SD component, the invoice is triggered and posted. If the service is not invoiced according to consumption, but on a flat rate, the invoicing procedure is based on the sales order. As an alternative to invoicing in SD, it is also possible to create the invoice for the service in IS-U/CCS and to clear it with consumption billing. (10) The invoiced amount is then entered as a debit amount in the FI-CA component. © SAP AG

IUT110

4-19

o n l y

F o r

Document

Create Service Connection Create customer order

Accept quotation Create quotation

Agent

Customer Agent

Create service order

System

Workflow Payment

Trigger invoicing

Confirm service order

Lay service connection

b y

u s e

Agent

Agent

 SAP AG 2003

„ The "service connection" business process (such as new installation of a service connection or extension of an existing service connection) can be further divided into three subprocesses:

b y

• Quotation processing • Order processing

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Technician

u s e

• Order closing and invoicing „ The order processing subprocess includes the external customer order and the internal service order.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Customer

„ The workflows for the business processes are already defined in IS-U.

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-20

Work Management: Interfaces to External Systems

z Technical objects in Work Management z Service orders and service objects z Service products z Interfaces to external systems

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-21

Possible Interface Scenario

R/3 Standard GBC

IS-U

Service Orders Confirmations

Resource planning planning

Applications Outage Notifications and Orders

o n l y

Monitoring of the situation

SCADA

Transformer station outages

Geographical data

AM/FM GIS

C S C

b y

Work Manag.

Mobile devices

Outage Confirmations

Outage Analysis

i n t e r n a l

Connection information

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Service orders Confirmations

F o r

GIS Business Connector

„ GIS:

Geographical Information System

„ AM/FM:

Asset Management / Facility Management

„ MDI:

Mobile Data Interface

C S C

„ GBC:

b y

„ SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

MDI

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-22

Integration of SAP and GIS with the GBC

SAP

GBC

GIS

Object ID Transformer Transformer

Connection Connection object object

Connection Connection

Object ID Connection information

Device Device

• Call GIS functions and data from the SAP System • Call SAP system functions and data from the GIS

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ The GIS Business Connector enables business processes to run seamlessly between a SAP system and a GIS. The GBC can:

b y

„ In addition to this, the GBC can manage the object keys of both systems, which ensures data consistency. „ No programming is required to set up the GBC. „ In this example, the information on the connections between the transformer and the GIS is stored in the GIS. You can call this information from the SAP system.

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-23

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Device Device location location

Connectivity information

F o r

o n l y

Transformer Transformer station station

Work Management: Summary

z Service objects simplify and standardize the processing of service orders z Service products enable you to offer and sell services as products z The service connection workflow is supplied with IS-U It contains quotation processing, order processing and invoicing

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Work Management contains interfaces to several external systems

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-24

Exercises Unit: Work Management Topic: Service Orders At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Perform the Front Office process “Create service order”.

You familiarize yourself with service orders and service objects.

Create a service order using the CIC.

Under the Environment tab page in the navigation area, select the dual rate meter and access the Front Office process Create repair order by means of a right mouse click. Which order number has been assigned by the system? ______________________________________________________ 1-1-3

Which work center has been determined? Which transactions are transferred to the service order? ______________________________________________________

o n l y

1-1-4

Where are work center and transactions transferred from? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

F o r

1-1-2

b y

i n t e r n a l

Identify the business partner.

u s e

b y

Business partner Elmer Petersheim, Massachusetts Avenue 0## in Boston, reports a device malfunction. Create a service order (repair order) using the CIC.

u s e

1-1-1

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

1-1

4-25

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

4-26

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Work Management Topic: Service Orders

1-1

Create service order. Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center

C S C

b y

u s e

1-1-3

Display the service order. The work center is in the service order header. You can find the transactions on the tab page Transactions.

1-1-4

When you call the front office process, select a service object. The work center is stored in this service object. The transactions are in the task list, which is also stored in the service object.

C S C

You can also determine the service order from the clipboard in the navigation area or from the customer contact in the Business objects tab page (select and right mouse click on Display in each case).

b y

1-1-2

u s e

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Service order number: __________

i n t e r n a l

Use the search functions in the CIC to determine your business partner. Enter the data and confirm this by pressing Enter. By pressing Enter a second time, the customer data will be recorded in the Environment tab page. Expand the structure of Elmer Petersheim’s private account to the dual rate meter and select this. Access the front office process by right mouse clicking and choosing Create repair order. The service order is created in the background. Save the customer contact. Contacts and service orders are listed under the Documents tab page in the navigation area once you have pressed Refresh. You can display the document by selecting them and choosing Display (right mouse click).

F o r

o n l y

1-1-1

© SAP AG

IUT110

4-27

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

4-28

IUT110

© SAP AG

Device Technology

Contents: z Device category as the basis for device definition Device category data and attributes

„

Integration in the standard R/3 System

o n l y

z Devices and registers „

Device data

„

Integration in the standard R/3 System

„

Register data

F o r

z Device lifecycle

C S C

z Device inspection „

Sample lot

„

Certification

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-1

Device Technology: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the function of the device category z Process device-related activities „

Definition of the device category and device features

z Explain device inspection „

Sampling procedure

„

Certification

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Explain how the device category and the device are integrated in the standard SAP System

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-2

Demands on Device Management

z Technical modeling of complex devices and installation structures (such as integrated water meters, instrument panels) SAP Utilities

z Organization of billing-related data (such as rental prices, meter readings) z Recording of comprehensive device history as the basis for meter reading, billing, maintenance, and inspection

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Controlling device stocks in terms of quantity and value, integration in Materials Management and Asset Management

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-3

Device Technology: Device Category

z Device category as the basis for device definition z Devices and registers z Device lifecycle z Device inspection

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-4

o n l y

Device „

„

Manuf. by Siemens

„

Prod. year: 1997

„

Valid from 01.07.97

„

„ „

Single-rate meter that is subject to certification Plastic housing and external seal Six pre-decimal places, one decimal place

Serial number AEG-980101-125

„

Manuf. by AEG

„

Prod. year: 1998

„

Valid from Jan. 1, 1998

„ „

Serial number Sie-970701-503

Serial no. LGY-980701-300

„

Manuf. by Landis&Gyr

„

Prod. year: 1998

„

Valid from July 1, 1998

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Device category

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

The Device and the Device Category

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-5

Modeling of Devices

Basic device cat.

„ „

o n l y

Device category 1 Device category 2

Device 1

=> Features of similar devices „ „

=> Specific device data

Device 2

C S C

Definition of technical device data Recording of inspection and certification periods The device category corresponds to the material in the MM component

„

Device 3

„ „

„ „

Device number/serial number Activity dates, such as installation, removal, or meter reading Certification and maintenance data "Device" corresponds to "equipment" in the Plant Maintenance (PM) component

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

i n t e r n a l

• Transformers convert. (Example: electrical voltage) • ARCRs (audio frequency ripple control receivers) transmit information via the electricity grid by means of audio frequency modulation.

o n l y

• Remote meters measure consumption from a distance • Correctors calculate standard cubic meters from gas values • Pressure regulators adjust gas pressure • Sensors act as pulse generators, e.g. temperature sensors

IUT110

C S C

• Counters calculate heat quantities generated in district heating

b y

• Meters measure consumption

F o r

„ Examples of basic device categories:

© SAP AG

i n t e r n a l

b y

meter Transformers Pressure regulators

„

F o r

u s e

=> Basic functions of device categories, such as:

5-6

Integration with Logistics

IS-U Device Management

Logistics

Device category

Material

o n l y

F o r

Device

• Technical data such as the register group, the input/output group, and command group and so on. • Installation, as well as removal and replacement of devices

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ IS-U functions of device management include:

• Installation structure for modeling devices and register relationships, in addition to rate data • Organization and carrying out of meter readings in the service territory „ Integration of IS-U/CCS Device Management with the standard R/3 Logistics component makes it possible to use the following: • Inventory Management (MM-IM component) • Purchasing (MM-PUR component) • Warehouse Management (MM-IM and MM-WM components) • Plant Maintenance (PM component) • Classification system

IUT110

5-7

o n l y

• Inspection: sampling procedure, certification, periodic replacement

© SAP AG

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Equipment

Device category

The device category groups together devices with the same features (data).

F o r

Device categories are managed as materials with a material number in the Materials Management application component.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Definition of Device Category

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-8

Device Category Data

Certification

Logistics

o n l y

• Storage • Warehouse Management • Transport data

Device category

• Certification requirement • Certification period

Planning

Additional data

• Procurement planning • Price estimate • Forecasts

• Register group • Winding group • Input/output group

dependent on basic device category

MM data

i n t e r n a l

C S C

• Construction class • Function class • Price class • Notes

• Description of material • Value, price

F o r

IS-U data

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

General

Basic data

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-9

Possible Elements of the Device Category

Function-related Informative

Material MM

Register group

Device category IS-U

o n l y

Winding group

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Command group

b y

 SAP AG 2003

„

Certain functional element groups are required, depending on the basic device category. Examples:

o n l y

i n t e r n a l

„

Data on device category elements can be arranged according to division category (the reactive current/active current indicator can for instance only be maintained in the register group of the electrical division).

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

y Allocation of a winding group in which the billing data is recorded is obligatory for devices of the TRANSFORMERS basic device category. An input/output group can also be maintained for information purposes (such as for service technicians), if required.

b y

y Devices of the basic device category METERS must be allocated to a register group. However, an input/output group may be assigned for technical descriptions of the available device interfaces, if desired.

u s e

u s e

F o r

F o r

Input/output group

5-10

Device Category: Device and Register

z Device category as the basis for device definition z Devices and registers z Device lifecycle z Device inspection

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-11

o n l y

Device

A device is an instrument that is used to measure consumption, process data, or control and protect other instruments.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Device category

F o r

Devices are managed in the Plant Maintenance (PM) application component as pieces of equipment with equipment numbers.

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Definition of Devices

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-12

Device Data Header data General • Inventory number • Weight/volume • Reference data • Manufacturer data • Stock information

Processes Processes • Maintenance orders • Service orders • Messages • Capacity planning

o n l y

C S C

b y

Device

Device-specific data

Plant Maintenance

PM

• Group data, prod. year • Manufacturer, cat. desc. • Ownership status • Certification data

• Maintenance plant • Maint. planning plant • Maint. planner group • Main work center

IS-U

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

• Installation and removal • Modification and disconnection • Certification • Meter reading

i n t e r n a l

„ The device master record is divided into various sections (tabs): • General data: technical data, reference data, manufacturer data

b y

• Location data: area assignment and account assignment elements • IS-U data: - Technical data: register group, winding group, command group (depending on the device basic category)

o n l y

- Certification /inspection data: year of certification, certification status, lot, year of replacement, inspection status - Processes: installation, removal, modification, and disconnection - Master data: business partners, connection object, device location, location, premises - Meter reading results, designated plants - Serialization data: allocated to material and serial number with stock information, plant and location. „ When devices are moved (e.g. goods receipt, goods issue, installation, removal), the equipment status is updated (ESTO, AVLB, INST). The status of the device informs the user that a certain business process has been performed. (Example: ESTO means that the device was entered in the system via a goods receipt posting and is available in a warehouse).

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

i n t e r n a l

• Device category, basic category • Lock status • Change documents • Time slices

F o r

F o r

General

• Material and serial no. • Equipment category and number • Status

5-13

Definition of a Register

Device category Device

o n l y

This can refer to the actual instrument or simply the display in an electronic device.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

The register is identified by a register number in the device.

F o r

A device that meters consumption, energy, and so on.

C S C

Register

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-14

Register data

General • Register category • Register type (time zone) • Pre-decimal places • Decimal places

o n l y

C S C

Meter reading

Register

• Reason • Type of reading, meter reader • Date Status

Meter reading

Register relationships

• Number of meter reading results per meter reading • Indicator: nonmetering register

• Relationship type • Relationship register • Operation code

Technical data

Sample register relationship

i n t e r n a l

b y

• Recorded meter reading • Estimated meter reading • Multiple allocation

Technical • Quantity unit • Register code, such as reactive energy or active power • Display type, transformer

Meter readings

F o r

Process data

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

• Active/reactive relationship

• VCF relationship (thermal gas billing)

b y

i n t e r n a l

„ Examples of register relationships:

F o r

u s e

Register configuration

• Serial switching relationship

C S C

• On-peak/off-peak relationship

o n l y

• Control relationship • VCF calculation relationship (thermal gas billing) „ You can assign individual validations to each register relationship to check the meter reading results. Example: Meter reading results from two registers that are connected by a control relationship can only differ by a maximum of 1%. If this tolerance is exceeded, the meter reading result is not accepted and is assigned the status "implausible".

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-15

Device Technology: Device Lifecycle

z Device category as the basis for device definition z Devices and registers z Device lifecycle z Device inspection

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-16

Central Data Objects - Integration in Logistics

Business partner

Billing document (utility)

Contract (utility)

Point of delivery

Installation

Premise

Device category

Device

Device location

Connection object

o n l y

C S C

FI-CA FI-CA

Connection Register group

Register

i n t e r n a l

b y

Contract account

F o r

Integration with Logistics

MR order

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

FI-CA Document

IS-U IS-U

Cross Cross appl. appl.

„ Device category = material „ Device = equipment

b y

„ Device location = technical location „ Connection object = Technical location

C S C

„ Connection = equipment

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Regional structure

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-17

o n l y

C S C

PM

Purchase requisition

Purchase order Goods receipt

Transfer

Retirement

IS-U

Inspection/ Inspection/ certification/ certification/ reprogramming reprogramming

Device Management (Installation)

Goods issue

Installation Removal/ replacement

i n t e r n a l

b y

MM

F o r

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

„ Although device installation is performed within IS-U/CCS, it is, however, based on a modified version of the PM component.

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

„ If the Materials Management (MM) component is not implemented, it is also possible to create devices directly in IS-U/CCS. However, IS-U/CCS does not provide inventory management functionality.

b y

„ Devices are created in an integrated system using standard R/3 components, such as Purchasing (MM-PUR), Inventory Management (MM-IM) and Plant Maintenance (PM). Devices are created as pieces of equipment in the system by posting a goods receipt for any number of devices of a particular device category. The entire goods procurement process can be performed in an optional first step (purchase requisition ordering and so on). A prerequisite is that the device category has already been created and therefore exists as a material master in the MM component. The serial number profile of the material master (in Customizing) ensures that the device in question is supplied with the necessary IS-U data.

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Device Life Cycle

5-18

Documentation for the Device Lifecycle

z IS-U

z z

z MM

z z z

o n l y

z z z z

Maintenance of technical objects and equipment Work planning, maintenance planning Maintenance processing Service contracts: contracts, maintenance plans Service processing: notifications, orders, completion confirmations Service planning: scheduling, work plans

i n t e r n a l

CS

z

Purchasing: purchase orders, inquiries/quotations, outline agreements Warehouse logistics: transport, stocktaking, transfer posting Inventory management: goods movement, reservation Valuation, stocktaking, material requirements planning

F o r

C S C

z PM

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

z

Specification of the device: device category, device Installation: installation, removal, replacement, installation structure Meter reading: organization, meter reading orders, entry of meter reading results Inspection and certification: internal or external periodic replacement procedure or sampling procedure

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-19

Device Technology: Device Inspection

z Device category as the basis for device definition z Devices and registers z Device lifecycle z Device inspection

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-20

Introduction: Device Inspection and Certification

SAP Utilities

z External certification involves a device being inspected by a state inspection authority. If a device passes an inspection according to the prescribed margins of error, the device is certified for the calibration validity period. z Internal certification involves the utility company voluntarily inspecting a device according to company standards. When the internal certification period expires, the device is inspected again in accordance with the company's criteria and the certification is renewed.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z In the certification procedure, you can either inspect all devices or a sample of devices.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-21

Overview of Certification Procedure

4567,8 4567,8 Si emens

4567,8

4567,8 4567,8 4567,8 Si emens

4567,8

4567,8

4567,8

4567,8

Si emens Si emens

Property number

Si emens Si emens

Propert y number

Propert y number

Propert y number

4567,8

4567,8

SI E-$/)($%)/

SIE-$/)($%)/

SIE-$/)($%)/ Si emens

SIE-$/)($%)/

SI E-$/)($%)/

Si emens Si emens

4567,8 Si emens Propert y number

4567,8

SIE-$/)($%)/

4567,8

Property number

Si emens

4567,8

SI E-$/)($%)/ SI E-$/)($%)/

Si emens

SI E-$/)($%)/

Propert y number SI E-$/)($%)/

4567,8 Si emens

4567,8

4567,8

4567,8

Si emens

Property number SI E-$/)($%)/

Si emens

Property number

4567,8

Si emens

Property number

Property number

Property number SI E-$/)($%)/

Si emens Propert y number

SI E-$/)($%)/

Property number

SIE-$/)($%)/

Property number

4567,8

SI E-$/)($%)/

4567,8

Si emens

SI E-$/)($%)/

Si emens

Property number

Property number

Si emens SI E-$/)($%)/ Propert y number

SI E-$/)($%)/

SIE-$/)($%)/

o n l y

Device category A

Device category B

Periodic list

Sample 4567,8

4567,8

4567,8

4567,8 4567,8 4567,8 4567,8 4567,8 Si emens 4567,8 Si emens Si emens 4567,8 Propert y 4567,8 Property Si emensnumber 4567,8 Property Si emensnumber Si emens number 4567,8 PropertySIE-$/)($%)/ 4567,8 Propert ySI E-$/)($%)/ Si emensnumber 4567,8 Propert ySI E-$/)($%)/ Si emensnumber Si emensnumber 4567,8 Propert ySI E-$/)($%)/ Si emens 4567,8 PropertySIE-$/)($%)/ number 4567,8 PropertySIE-$/)($%)/ Si emens number Si emens

4567,8

Si emens

Si emens

Si emens

Si emens

Propert y number

Propert y number

Property number

Propert y number

SIE-$/)($%)/

SIE-$/)($%)/

SI E-$/)($%)/

SI E-$/)($%)/

C S C

b y

SIE-$/)($%)/

Switch orders for sample devices and reserve sample devices

PropertySI E-$/)($%)/ Propert ySI E-$/)($%)/ Si emensnumber Si emensnumber PropertySI E-$/)($%)/ number Propert ySIE-$/)($%)/ number SI E-$/)($%)/ SIE-$/)($%)/

number

Propert ySI E-$/)($%)/ Si emensnumber Propert ySIE-$/)($%)/ number SIE-$/)($%)/

Switch orders for all devices

 SAP AG 2003

IUT110

5-22

o n l y

© SAP AG

C S C

„ Device category A is certified using the sample lot procedure. Therefore, only a small percentage of the devices (the sample devices) are removed for testing. The sample devices that are to be removed are determined using the sample lot procedure. If the test devices pass the tests, the certification of all devices allocated to this lot is extended by the time span set in Customizing (4 years, for example). As a rule, the test devices are certified individually (for example, for 16 years).

b y

„ The devices from device category B are to be certified individually (for example, because they are particularly prone to malfunctions, or there are too few devices for the sample lot procedure) As a result, the devices in question are transferred to the periodic replacement list and are removed. All devices are checked and - if they pass the test - certified individually.

u s e

u s e

SIE-$/)($%)/

SI E-$/)($%)/

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

SIE-$/)($%)/

F o r

F o r

Propert y number

SIE-$/)($%)/

SIE-$/)($%)/

Propert y number

Si emens Propert y number

SIE-$/)($%)/

Propert y number

4567,8

Si emens Propert y number

Propert y number

Si emens Propert y number

Si emens Property number

4567,8

Si emens

Si emens

4567,8

Certification Procedure Description:

Devices due for certification are removed completely and replaced by identical devices.

Procedure: Create lot

z

Compile lot

z

Determine lot devices

z

1. Perform first drawing

z

Inspection

o n l y

z

Procedure:

Sample

Periodic replacement list

IS-U

z

Create periodic replacement list

z

Select device categories

z

Create list in foreground or background

z

Replacement orders created automatically

F o r

C S C

Certification of devices

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Description:

Only a representative sample of devices is removed for inspection and replaced.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-23

Sampling procedure

z Description: „

Used for selecting and placing devices in sample lots

„

A defined number of devices are drawn for inspection from this lot.

„

The results of the inspection determine the renewal period of the lot.

Official lots: Renewal of the calibration validity of the lot devices if the sample devices are certified.

„

Internal lots: Quality control

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„

F o r

o n l y

z Goals:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-24

Inspection Using the Sampling Procedure

Create Create lot lot

Perform Perform 1st 1st drawing drawing

Inspect Inspect sample sample devices devices

No

?

o n l y

Break Break up up lot lot

Transfer Transfer devices devices to to periodic periodic file file

C S C

b y

Perform Perform 1st 1st drawing drawing

?

Inspection passed

Yes

Certify Certify sample sample devices devices

i n t e r n a l

Renew Renew lot lot

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

„ If necessary, you can use the standard R/3 component quality management (PM-QM) to organize and manage the test data. This component contains comprehensive functions for organizing test rules, test transactions and test results.

b y

„ The flow chart displays the typical sample lot procedure. Some steps may be carried out differently depending on the configuration of the Customizing tables (for example, a second drawing is normally not possible).

u s e

u s e

Determine Determine lot lot devices devices

F o r

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Compile Compile lot lot

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-25

Periodic Replacement

l ova Rem

z In periodic replacement, devices that are to be certified are removed, and replaced by the same kind of devices.

z Devices that are to be replaced on a certain date are selected from the periodic replacement list.

C S C

b y

u s e

u s e

„ The periodic replacement component is optional. It is needed if: • Devices are to be certified individually • A lot does not exist for the sampling procedure, and the devices have to be certified individually

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

z A work order is then created for the devices that are to be replaced.

F o r

o n l y

Installation

z Devices that are to be replaced are managed in the periodic replacement list.

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-26

Device Technology: Unit Summary

z The device category divides devices into functional groups and specifies their features. The device category corresponds to the material in MM. z The device is a measuring instrument that "inherits" the features of the device category. These "inherited " features can be enhanced by individual specifications, if required. z Integration in the PM and MM application components allows you to completely process all service and logistics functions.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Devices are certified and inspected for internal and external purposes by means of periodic replacement and sampling procedures.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-27

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

5-28

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Device Technology Topic: Creating and Delivering Devices At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Distinguish between devices, device categories, and basic device categories. • Provide information on devices. • Understand integration with the SAP PM and MM components. Provide information on the devices installed at a customer’s location.

o n l y

1-1-1

u s e

b y

C S C

Display all devices for customer TB010110## and select the water meter. To which device category does this device belong? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 1-1-2

u s e

When was the last meter reading result recorded and what was the result? ______________________________________________________

b y

______________________________________________________ 1-1-3

How many registers does the meter have? ______________________________________________________

C S C

______________________________________________________

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

1-1

F o r

The creation and delivery of devices is standardized by integration in SAP components.

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-29

1-2

Display all devices for customer TB010110## and select the double-rate electricity meter. 1-2-1

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 1-2-2

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 1-2-3

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 1-2-4

o n l y

C S C

b y

Has the device already been drawn as a sample device?

What is the calibration validity? How long is the internal certification period? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

1-3

i n t e r n a l

Specify the connection data for device TB010110##. 1-3-1

What is the current connection object? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

1-3-2

u s e

u s e

Is the device already in a lot?

F o r

What is the current device location? ______________________________________________________

b y

______________________________________________________ 1-3-3

Display the structure graphic and describe the procedure.

C S C

______________________________________________________

o n l y

______________________________________________________

F o r

i n t e r n a l

When is the device due for certification again?

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-30

o n l y

C S C

1-5

True or false? 1-5-1

Device technology is integrated into the R/3 logistics component. ______________________________________________________

1-5-2

Devices are based directly on a basic device category. ______________________________________________________

1-5-3

Device categories group together similar devices. ______________________________________________________

1-5-4

The device category is managed in the MM component ______________________________________________________

1-5-5

The register group is only allocated to the device category for information purposes. ______________________________________________________

1-5-6

The device is managed in the Plant Maintenance (PM) component as a piece of equipment. ______________________________________________________

1-5-7

Devices can be allocated to more than one lot.

i n t e r n a l

1-5-8

Only the sampling procedure can be used when inspecting devices for internal and external purposes.

b y

______________________________________________________

u s e

______________________________________________________

i n t e r n a l

b y

Display the material master data for device TB010110##. (Comment: the device category – i.e., the material – is assigned to Plant “U001”).

F o r

u s e

1-4

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-31

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

5-32

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Device Technology Topic: Creating and Delivering Devices

1-1 1-1-1

Select the customer in the Customer Interaction Center. Select the premise in the navigation area. Choose Premise environment (right mouse click). Expand the sub-tree and double-click the device TB010120##. The device category is displayed on the IS data tab page. Do not leave this screen.

1-1-2

After pressing the MR results button, all the readings are displayed.

o n l y

C S C

b y

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

You are located in the device display for TB010120##. Double-click on the Register group field (tab page Group). The master data for the register group is displayed. You can obtain information on the number of registers and their technical specifications and functionalities from the table entries. Return to the premise environment.

i n t e r n a l

1-1-3

F o r

This lists all meter reading results. Pressing F1 calls up help for each column. Pressing F4 displays the meaning of each key. Return to device display.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-33

1-2 1-2-1

Double-click on Double-rate electricity meter. The data environment of the meter is displayed. Double-click on the device TB010110##. Switch to the IS data tab page. On the lower set of tabs, switch to tab page Cert/ins. data. The field Next repl. year displays the year in which the device must next be certified, either internally or externally. Do not leave this screen.

1-2-2

In the IS-data view, choose the Ins. data tab. If the Lot field is filled, the device has been allocated to a lot. Otherwise, a lot has not yet been allocated. Do not leave this screen.

1-2-3

In the view IS data Æ Ins. data. If the Samp.dev.status field is empty, the device has not yet been drawn as a sample device.

C S C

•

Sample device from second drawing

•

Spare device from first drawing

b y

o n l y

Sample device from first drawing

•

Spare device from second drawing

•

Device cannot be used as a sample device

u s e

•

F o r

o n l y

Choose the Mast. data tab page. 1-3-1

The current connection object is TB010110##.

1-3-2

The current device location is TB010111DL0##.

1-3-3

In the menu, choose Structure Æ Structure graphic or Cntrl F7. If a dialog box appears with the question “Expand structure upwards?” choose “Yes”. You are now looking at an illustration of the structure. Here you can further expand the structure using the Levels above button. The current connection object is TB010110##.

© SAP AG

C S C

1-3

The calibration validity is stored in the device category. Double-clicking on the Device category field displays the material data for the device. Switch to the Cert./order data tab page. The calibration validity is displayed in years. This is used to calculate the next year of replacement. In the Int. cert. per. field, the internal certification period is displayed. This shows the internal period set by the company, after which a device must be reinspected and certified.

b y

i n t e r n a l

1-2-4

u s e

Not sample device

i n t e r n a l

•

F o r

Possible status of sample devices:

IUT110

5-34

1-4 •

Determine the device category of the device TB010110## in the device master data.

•

Open a new session and change to logistics using the path Logistics → Materials management → Material master → Material → Display → Display current

•

Enter the key for the material (= device category) and choose the Data button.

•

Select all views and confirm the entry.

•

As materials are always defined for a specific plant, you must also specify the plant. Enter the plant key U001 and confirm it.

o n l y

True. The device category is managed in the component MM using the material number.

1-5-5

False. Register groups are assigned to the device category. However, these not only have an informative purpose, but also a functional purpose and are used for processing and inspecting meter reading results. For example, validation checks for the number of premises, possible meter reading overflows or when converting results depending on the transformation relationship.

1-5-6

True. The device is managed in PM using the equipment number.

1-5-7

False. Devices can only be allocated to one lot.

1-5-8

False. In addition to the sample procedure, the periodic replacement procedure can also be used.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

b y

1-5-4

© SAP AG

IUT110

5-35

o n l y

True.

C S C

1-5-3

b y

False. Devices are based on a device category, which in turn consists of one or more basic device categories.

u s e

1-5-2

i n t e r n a l

True. IS-U device technology is integrated in the components MM, PM and CS.

F o r

1-5-1

C S C

1-5

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

5-36

IUT110

© SAP AG

Device Installation

Contents: z Device installation/removal/replacement „

Technical installation/removal

„

Billing-related installation/removal

z Installation structure „

Device allocations

„

Register relationships

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-1

Device Installation: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe and perform device installation, removal, and replacement. You will also be able to describe how these functions are integrated with the Service Management (SM) application component. z Explain the relationship between the connection object, the device location, and the device, and how they are integrated in the Plant Maintenance (PM) application component.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Display devices of an installation and describe the installation structure.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-2

Device Installation: Business Scenario

z Device installation if replaced periodically „

Create and plan service orders

„

Execute service orders: Remove old devices and install new ones (device replacement)

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-3

Installation: Installation, Removal And Replacement

z Device installation, removal and replacement z Installation structure

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-4

Business Scenario: Replacement of Sample Devices

Sample Sample devices devices in in aa lot lot must must be be replaced replaced for for certification certification

Technical Technical conclusion conclusion of of the the service service order order and and triggering triggering of of the the invoice invoice

o n l y

Device Device inspection Changes Changes to to data data in in the the system system ("full ("full device device replacement") replacement")

C S C

b y

Field force employee

Team leader field force

 SAP AG 2003

On-site On-site technical technical execution execution of of the the order order and and completion completion confirmation confirmation of of the the order order in in the the system system

o n l y

„ In the next step, the work order is executed on-site according to the process description: the old device is removed and is replaced by a new device of the same category. „ As soon as the work order is executed, it is documented accordingly in the system by means of a completion confirmation. „ When the completion certification has been successfully generated, the device replacement is carried out in the system and the order can be closed and invoiced, if necessary.

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

„ The work orders are then scheduled for execution, taking resource capacities and deadlines into account.

b y

„ Devices of a particular device category are due for certification. After the sample devices are defined using the lot procedure, the corresponding work orders are automatically generated for the removal of these devices. The work orders contain a complete description of the process, as well as a list of materials and resources that may be needed.

u s e

u s e

Device Device inspection

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Team leader field force

F o r

F o r

Planning Planning the the work work orders orders

Generation Generation of of work work orders orders to to replace replace the the devices devices

6-5

o n l y

Determine device location

z

The device location indicates where a device is installed in the connection object

z

The address of the connection object links the device location to regional structure

z

The location can be specified in more detail using location data, location supplement, and a long text. The service order is used to forward this information together with the address data to the field force employee.

z

The device location is a functional location in the PM application component.

z

The structure of the functional locations and the equipment (devices) installed provides a comprehensive overview of the technical systems installed.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Execute service order

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Service Order Execution: Determining the Device Location

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-6

Definition of the Device Location

Execute service order

Connection object Device location

o n l y

Device

F o r

C S C

The device location is the location in the connection object that is independent of a division and in which any number of devices can technically be installed.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Determine device location

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-7

Device Location Data

Execute service order

Independent of division

Reference to premise

• Installation location for devices of all divisions • Installation location for all device categories

• The device location can be allocated to a premise if required

Device location

Location data

Integration with PM

• Exact location and location supplement • Long text • Link to regional structure

• The device location is defined as a functional location below the connection object

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Determine device location

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-8

o n l y

Determine device location

Equipment Equipment

Connection Connection Higher-level Higher Higher-level

Connection Connection object object

Functional Functional location location Equipment Equipment

Device Device

Device Device Device Device location location

Lower-level Lower-level

Functional Functional location location

IS-U objects

PM objects

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Execute service order

F o r

Legend Installation of equipment

Hierarchical relationship between functional locations

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Relationships Between Technical Objects

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-9

Service Order Execution: Device Replacement & Service Order Confirmation Execute service order

o n l y

Service order order

The field force employee performs an onsite meter reading for the sample device and then physically removes the device.

z

The new device is installed in the device location. Since the new device has to perform the tasks and functions of the old device, it must be identical from a technical point of view.

z

A function test is performed and new meter readings can be taken as a basis for billing.

z

This concludes the technical aspect of the service order and the field force employee enters the corresponding completion confirmation in the system.

Service order executed

i n t e r n a l

z

mete rea r no: 32 ding : __ 4561 ___ _

C S C

Device device carry out

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Determine device location

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-10

o n l y

Change System system

Determine device location

Device device carry out

Service order order

Service order executed

Locate installation

z

The Back Office employee responsible receives the completion confirmation for the service order in electronic or paper form. The completion confirmation contains all the central information for any data changes required in the system.

z

The customer service representative can locate the installation affected using the device number of the device removed and start the "Full replacement" transaction using the following data: „

Device location

„

Installation

„

Activity date

„

Device number of the sample device

„

Device number of the new device

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Execute service order

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Data Changes: Installation Location

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-11

Data Changes: Device Replacement Execute service order

Change System

Determine device location

Execute device replacement

Service order

Locate installation

Execute device replacement

Data change completed

Service order executed

z

The customer service representative enters the meter reading from the device removed and the meter reading at installation of the new device. This ensures that there are no gaps in the consumption history, which provides the basis for billing.

z

Once the data has been saved, the device replacement is complete.

o n l y

F o r

• Billing-related removal of the old device: This terminates the business relationship between the device and the business partner's installation (and therefore the contract). • Technical removal of the old device: This removes the link to the device location, (and therefore to the connection object). All existing register relationships are terminated and the current time slice for the device is removed. At the same time, a new time slice begins. The status in the device master record is changed from EEGB (equipment installed) to EFRE (equipment free).

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ The following steps are performed automatically in the background for a device replacement:

b y

• Technical installation of the new device: The connection of the new register to the device location (and therefore the connection object) is established. The device receives the status EEGB. At the same time, a new time slice is opened for the device, beginning on the installation date. Any register relationships are transferred from the old device to the new meter. • Billing-related installation of the new device: The new device is connected to the business master data (installation, contract, business partner). Data that is relevant to rates (such as the rule for determining the clearing price, rate data at device and register level, information about extrapolation of consumption values) is transferred to the new device. „ Processing steps that are performed automatically for a device replacement can also be performed separately (for instance by different customer service representatives). Individual transactions, such as technical installation, billing-related installation, and full installation (= both steps in one transaction) can be used to perform each step of the installation and removal processes separately.

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-12

o n l y

F o r

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Technical and Billing-Related Installation

Business Business partner partner

Contract Contract 11

(Company (Company code code 1) 1) Fresh Fresh water water

Installation Installation 11

o n l y

Installation Installation 22

Premise Premise

Billing-related installation

C S C

b y

Waste Waste water water

Device 1

Billing-related installation

Technical installation

Device Device location location

i n t e r n a l

Connection Connection object object

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

(Company (Company code code 2) 2)

F o r

„ Devices can be allocated to several installations from a billing perspective (billing-related installation). However, each device can be allocated to only one device location from a technical point of view (technical installation).

b y

„ Since one contract exists per installation, a separate installation in the relevant division is created for each contract. Accordingly, any meters installed are allocated twice from the point of view of billing.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Contract Contract 22

Contract Contract account account

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-13

Installation: Installation Structure

z Device installation, removal and replacement z Installation structure

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-14

o n l y

C S C

b y

Electricity

Audio frequency ripple control receiver

Supply Grid

i n t e r n a l

Street

Device allocation Register relationship  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Serial switching

F o r

„ The installation structure comprises all technical and billing-related data for a utility contract.

C S C

„ In the example above, switching between the two rates of the double-rate electricity meter is controlled by an audio frequency ripple control receiver. For information purposes, this is described in the system as a device allocation of the ARCR type. At the same time, one of the registers of the double-rate electricity meter has a serial switching relationship with another register. The consumption of the serial switching register (secondary register) is automatically deducted from the consumption of the main register during the billing run.

b y

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Example of an Installation Structure

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-15

Technical Installation Structure z Device allocations

z Register relationships

Reactive/active relationship

„

Transformers

„

„

Pressure regulator

Serial switching relationship

„

Customer-specific allocations

„

On-peak/off-peak relationship

„

Control relationship

„

VCF relationship

„

VCF calculation relationship

„

Customer-specific relationships

„ Register relationships

• The serial switching relationship is automatically subordinate to all other relationships during meter reading and validation. • The on-peak/off-peak relationship describes the relationship between registers of different register categories (e.g. on-peak and off-peak registers). • In a control relationship, all registers are added and the totals compared with the designated control register. • The VCF relationship (gas division only) is needed for billing difference quantities that result from different meter readings for the operating volume meter of the corrector and another external operating volume meter. • The VCF calculation relationship (gas division only) is needed for billing difference quantities that result from different meter readings for the operating cubic meter meter of the corrector and another external operating cubic meter meter.

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-16

o n l y

• In a reactive/active relationship, all active registers of a register category and all reactive registers of the same register category are added and the total is used to carry out the cosine phi examination.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Device allocations describe relationships between installed devices. A device allocation is always composed of a controlling and a controlled device (Example: A calculation factor, which is taken into account in consumption billing, is defined in the installation structure at register level for the "transformer" allocation category).

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

„

i n t e r n a l

Audio frequency ripple control receiver

F o r

„

Billing-Related Installation Structure z Rate data

z Extrapolation data

„

Relevance to clearing price

„

Expected period consumption

„

Relevance to billing

„

„

Price class

Fixed consumption values weighted linearly

„

Rate type

„

Rate fact group

„

Discount

(absolute or relative value)

o n l y

F o r

• During device installation (or afterwards), the "relevance to clearing price" indicator determines whether a clearing price should be charged or not. • If the "relevance to billing" indicator is activated at register level, a plausible meter reading result is expected for billing.

• The rate type is maintained at device or register level and controls rate determination, together with the installation's rate category. • The rate fact group is also assigned at device or register level. The rate fact group contains specific values (e.g. constants) and/or keys (e.g. price keys) that are assigned to a rate. • Discounts can be assigned at register level for quantities and services ("register discount"). „ Period consumption is used in the extrapolation of meter readings when no representative meter reading results are available (such as for new customers).

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-17

o n l y

• The price class can be defined at at the device category, device, or register level. The price class, together with the price level, determines the clearing price (e.g. meter rental) from the rate.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Rate and extrapolation data are usually determined during maintenance of the installed device. However, these can be changed at any time under "installation structure" in the menu.

b y

F o r

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Device Installation: Summary

z The precise location of the devices is found using device location in IS-U/CCS. The device location is a functional location in the PM application component. z Devices can be removed or installed in two separate steps that are distinguished in terms of billing and technical factors. Devices can also be removed or installed in one step for both billing and technical data.

o n l y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

F o r

z During device replacement, full removal of the old device and full installation of the new device is carried out in one step. In this way, technical and billing-related data is automatically transferred from the old device to the new device.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-18

Exercises Unit: Device Installation Topic: Installation and Removal of Devices At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Display all the devices in an installation • Install and remove devices • Describe integration with the PM component

C S C

b y

u s e

• Technical and billing-related installation of the new meter. 1-1

Water meter TB010120## belonging to customer TB010110## was faulty and was replaced by a new device with the same technical features by a field force employee. As the office-based employee responsible, you will first carry out the full removal of the old device and then the full installation of the new device in the system.

1-1-2

Access the device management component in a new session and carry out the removal of device TB010120## in one step for today’s date. Enter an appropriate removal reason and estimate the meter readings.

1-1-3

Then carry out the full installation of the new meter TB010200## in one step. Choose today’s date as the installation date and enter the meter reading at installation as 97.8 m³. Assign a rate type, a fact group, and a period consumption to the register. Enter an appropriate installation reason.

1-1-4

Finally, check the device replacement in the customer’s data environment display in the Customer Interaction Center.

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-19

o n l y

First, in the Customer Interaction Center, determine which device location and installation the device is assigned to. Use today’s date as activity date.

C S C

1-1-1

b y

(Note: this transaction can be processed quickly in one step using the transaction “device replacement”. In this transaction, the system carries out the full removal and installation in the background. However, in order to illustrate the individual steps in this task, you should carry out the device replacement step by step).

u s e

i n t e r n a l

• Billing-related removal of the faulty device from the installation and technical removal from the device location.

i n t e r n a l

F o r

F o r

o n l y

A customer’s water meter is faulty and must be replaced. To replace a device, the following steps are performed in the system:

1-2

Check the following features of the device you have just installed. 1-2-1

Installation date and installation reason: ______________________________________________________

1-2-2

Meter reading at installation: ______________________________________________________

1-2-3

Current business partner allocated: ______________________________________________________

1-2-4

Device manufacturer: ______________________________________________________

1-2-5

Maintenance planning plant:

o n l y

1-4

True or false?

1-4-2

Only devices of the same division can be installed in a device location. ______________________________________________________

1-4-3

Billing-relevant rate data must always be maintained during device installation. ______________________________________________________

1-4-4

C S C

i n t e r n a l

______________________________________________________

The device location is managed as a functional location in PM. ______________________________________________________

o n l y

1-4-5

The device location is the highest level in the functional location hierarchy in PM. ______________________________________________________

1-4-6

Device installation and removal automatically generates a time slice for the device. ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

F o r

During technical installation, the device is assigned to a device location and to an installation. Rate data cannot be maintained, but device locations can, however, be created, searched for and changed.

u s e

u s e

b y

1-4-1

i n t e r n a l

Display the structure graphic for the functional locations and their equipment for the newly installed device and complete the installation in the device location.

F o r

1-3

C S C

______________________________________________________

6-20

2

(optional) Create device allocation: Create a device allocation for the TRE 508010xx using the double-rate meter 5040xx. Use the installation TB010110xx and the device location TB010111dl0xx to do this. Maintain the following values for the double-rate meter: Installation date: Today’s date Rate type: Meter 1: On-peak rate; Register 2: Off-peak rate Meter reading read: 0 (both registers) Period consumption: 2000 (register 1) and 1000 (register 2) Fact groups: Residential customers Clearing price to be paid. TIPP: Install the TRE first and then the double-rate meter

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-21

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

6-22

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Device Installation Topic: Installation and Removal of Devices

1-1G 1-1-1

Find customer TB010110## in the CIC Double-click on the water meter TB010120## to select it and choose the tab page master data.

1-1-2

Choose device management from the SAP Easy Access menu: Utilities Industry Æ Device Management.

o n l y

Device Installation Æ Removal Æ Full

1-1-3

TB010111DL0##

TB010120## TB010120##

Choose the following for device installation: Device Installation Æ Installation Æ Full

C S C

1-1-4

TB010111DL0## TB010120## TB010200## 3001 0001 Residential customers 100

b y

Device location: Installation: New device: Rate type Fact group Period consumption

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Device location: Installation: Old device

i n t e r n a l

In the CIC, call up the data for business partner TB010110##.

o n l y

Choose the action box Info Æ Customer environment

F o r

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Choose the following for device removal:

Choose utility installation TB010120## by double-clicking on it. Branch to the device history of the devices allocated to the installation by pressing the Device history (DevHist) button.

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-23

1-2 1-2-1

Utilities Industry Æ Device Management. Choose: Technology Æ Device Æ Display Enter TB010200## in the Serial number field. Confirm your entry by pressing Enter The system displays the device master data. To obtain an overview of the time slices, press the Display time slice overview button.

b y

Using the MR results button you can call up a list of the previous meter readings.

1-2-3

Choose IS Data Æ Mast. Data

1-2-4

Choose tab page General in the upper work area. The producer of the device is listed in the field Manufacturer.

1-2-5

Plant maintenance planning plant: Choose the tab page Organization. This informs you of the allocation of the device to a planning plant.

Call up device management as follows: Utilities Industry Æ Device Management.

u s e

u s e

1-3

1-2-2

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

To check the installation date, choose IS data Æ Act./codes.

F o r

Choose device display as follows: Technology Æ Device Æ Display

b y

Choose the following menu items to call up the structure graphic: Structure → Structure graphic

C S C

The structure graphic screen appears:

o n l y

The entire structure graphic is displayed.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Call device management or double-click on the device in the CIC.

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-24

o n l y

C S C

b y

1-4-1

False. Device locations cannot be created during installation.

1-4-2

False. The device location describes the installation place in the connection object that is not dependent on a division. The device location can be explicitly assigned to a particular premise, if desired.

1-4-3

False. The billing-relevant rate data is not required during technical installation. This can be added during billing-related installation or full installation.

1-4-4

True.

1-4-5

False. The connection object represents the level above the device location in the hierarchy.

1-4-6

True.

Create device allocation: Call transaction EG31 (full installation). (To call up the node structure of this transaction, enter “search_sap_menu” in the SAP GUI transaction bar). Now install device 508010xx in device location TB010111dl0xx, installation TB010110xx. Enter today’s date. Save the installation. Select transaction EG31 again (full installation) and install a double-rate meter with the device number 5040xx in the device location 5040xx for business partner TB010110xx (installation TB010110xx). In the next screen, the system automatically proposes the TRE you installed previously. Enter the data relevant for billing: Meter reading:

0 (both registers)

Period consumption:

2000 (register 1) and 1000 (register 2)

Fact group:

Residential customers

b y

Register 1 = on-peak; register 2 = off-peak rate

u s e

Rate type:

i n t e r n a l

u s e

2

True or false?

F o r

Activate the function pay clearing price for the on-peak register.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

1-4

© SAP AG

IUT110

6-25

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

6-26

IUT110

© SAP AG

Meter Reading Contents: z Meter reading organization Scheduled and unscheduled meter readings

„

Street route

„

Scheduling

o n l y

z Meter reading procedure „

Creating the meter reading order

„

Options for result entry

„

Meter reading validations

„

Monitoring and correction of meter reading results

F o r

C S C

z Special functions „

Meter reading by customer via the Internet and telephone

„

Reversal

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-1

Meter Reading: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the meter reading procedure „

Scheduling and street route

„

Meter reading processing

„

Automatic and manual payment run

„

Single and mass entry

„

Single and mass estimation

„

Meter reading correction

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z Enter meter reading results by means of:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-2

Meter Reading: Business Scenario

z A customer telephones the customer call center to report his/her move-out The customer service agent enters the move-out date and the meter readings

„

An implausible reading means that the utility company has to carry out a control reading

o n l y

z Meter reading processing „

Creation of meter reading order

„

Enter or estimate meter reading results

F o r

z Start of billing and invoicing

C S C

„

i n t e r n a l

Final billing, followed by invoicing

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-3

Meter Reading: Meter Reading Organization

z Meter reading organization: Scheduling

„

Street route

z Meter reading procedure „

Processing the meter reading

„

Checking of meter reading results

„

Extrapolation of meter reading results

„

Meter reading by customer via the Internet

„

Reversal function

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

z Special functions

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-4

Indicator z

Predefined meter reading strategy

z

Date and area scheduled in regional structure Resources can be planned

z

Process z

Create meter reading schedule

z

Specify meter reading sequence

z

z

There are special reasons for the meter reading request, such as a move-in/out

z

Date and area cannot be scheduled

z

Meter reading cannot be planned

Process z

Create a single meter reading order

Create mass meter reading orders

z

Enter consumption

z

Check results

z

Enter results

z

Release for billing

z

Check results

z

Release for billing

Scheduled

Unscheduled

C S C

Meter reading

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Indicator

F o r

o n l y

Types of Meter Reading

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-5

Regional Structure and Scheduling

Business partner

Account

Postal regional structure

o n l y

City

Installation

Meter reading unit

Street section

Premise Political structure

C S C

b y

Portion

Connection object  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Street

Contract

i n t e r n a l

„ Portion: Grouping of contracts that are to be billed together. You allocate a contract to a portion either directly in the contract or indirectly via the meter reading units entered in the installations.

b y

„ Scheduling: Controlling and planning of the following processes: • Meter reading order creation

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Scheduling

F o r

• Periodic billing • Budget billing collection „ Meter reading unit: In a meter reading unit, installations (and the devices and registers installed in them) are grouped together for billing purposes according to regional characteristics. „ Scheduling is managed at the meter reading unit and portion levels.

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-6

o n l y

F o r

Master data

Regional structure

Scheduling Tasks

Portion 1 Portion 2

MR unit 1 MR unit 2

„

For joint billing

„

Where budget billing options are the same (budget billing cycle and scheduling)

z Grouping of utility installations „

Of the same billing class and division category

„

For joint billing

„

To control special features of meter reading, such as MDE, intervals

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

MR unit 3

z Grouping of contracts

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-7

Portions and Meter Reading Units

Portion A

Portion B

MR unit A.1 MR unit A.2

MR unit B0.1

A

MR unit B0.2

MR unit A.3

B

MR unit B0.3 MR unit B0.4 MR unit B0.5

F o r

o n l y

Portion C MR unit C0.1 MR unit C.3

i n t e r n a l

„ Meter reading units in a portion do not have to be located near one another; their grouping can also depend on other factors, such as billing conditions.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ A portion normally contains several meter reading units, which are structured according to location and/or scheduling requirements.

„ Example:

o n l y

• Portions A and B represent different city districts consisting almost entirely of households and small businesses (such as residential customers). Meter reading units in these portions are structured in such a way that they correspond to the daily work quota of the meter reader. • Since other meter reading cycles and billing conditions apply to commercial and industrial customers, major customers (such as industrial and business groups) within the area concerned are allocated to a separate portion (C). This portion consists of three meter reading units that are not in close proximity to each other. They are "islands" inside portions A and B. • The utility company bills residential customers periodically. Portion A is billed on June 15; portion B is billed on July 15. • Commercial and industrial customers are billed monthly. This means that portion C is billed on June 15, July 15, and so on.

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

MR unit C0.2

7-8

Schedule master records

Schedule records MR unit A_AUG01 2002

MR unit A_AUG01

Portion P_AUG01

A_AUG01 2003 Generation of schedule records

P_AUG01 2002

Parameter record P1

P_AUG01 2003

b y

C S C

P_AUG01 2004

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Portion

i n t e r n a l

„ Schedule records are generated from the settings in the parameter record and schedule master records (portion and meter reading unit).

b y

„ Schedule records refer to specific dates, which control meter reading and billing. „ Schedule records must be generated for portions and meter reading units before meter reading orders can be generated.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

A_AUG01 2004

F o r

o n l y

Generation of Schedule Records

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-9

27.7.

28.7.

31.7.

1.8.

2.8.

3.8.

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 1

End End of of Meter Meter Reading Reading period period

Billing period Scheduled Meter Reading date

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 2 for all meter reading units Meter reading period for meter reading unit 3

2005 2005

2004 2004 Portion A 27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7.

1.8.

2.8.

Portion A 27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7.

3.8.

1.8.

2.8.

3.8.

Meter reading

Meter reading

Billing Billing

Billing

C S C

b y

u s e

30.7.

 SAP AG 2003

„ The end of the meter reading period corresponds to the end of the billing period, and is used as a basis for defining dates of subsequent meter reading periods.

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-10

o n l y

„ The scheduled meter reading date is the date on which the schedule specifies the register is to be read. It is also the date for which periodic meter readings are generated in scheduling. It forms the basis for calculating the expected consumption during meter reading order creation; it also acts as the final date for determining the budget billing amount.

C S C

„ The scheduled billing date is the date on which the contracts belonging to a portion are billed. This takes the SAP calendar into account.

b y

„ End of billing period: This is the date on which the portion is to be billed for the first time. This date, together with the length of the billing period (that is, the period length), determines the date of the next billing (start of the next billing period = end of the billing period + 1 day).

u s e

i n t e r n a l

29.7.

i n t e r n a l

F o r

End Billing Per period

Scheduled billing date

Portion A

F o r

o n l y

Scheduling: Annual Billing

Meter Reading Organization: Street Route

MR unit A

City district 1

Str

Street 1

Street 2

Connection object 1

Street n

Connection object 2

Device location 1

Connection object n

Device location 2

Device 1

Device location n

Device 2

C S C

b y

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

„ You can use these components to determine the sequence in which devices in a supply territory are read. This enables you plan the optimum route for the meter reader.

b y

„ You make specifications in a meter reading unit according to the following criteria: • City

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Device n

• Street • House number (connection object)

o n l y

• Device location • Device „ You can maintain a meter reading sequence for an individual meter reading unit or create a joint meter reading sequence for several meter reading units. Prerequisite for a joint meter reading sequence of several meter reading units is the joint allocation of different meter reading units in the corresponding scheduling master records. „ The following enhancements are available for the meter reading sequence: • EDMLSORT (IS-U: Sorting meter reading orders for printout and download) „ You enter your own sorting of meter reading orders for printout and download.

© SAP AG

u s e

F o r

i n t e r n a l

City district n

254.1247.02

F o r

City district 2

o n l y

ee t ro ute

IUT110

7-11

Meter Reading: Process

z Meter reading organization: Scheduling

„

Street route

z Meter reading procedure „

Processing the meter reading

„

Checking of meter reading results

„

Extrapolation of meter reading results

„

Meter reading by customer via the Internet

„

Reversal function

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

z Special functions

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-12

Overview: Scheduled Meter Reading Output meter reading orders

Manual meter reading due

Mobile data entry meter reading due

Print meter reading documents

Download meter reading data

Read meter

Read meter

Enter meter reading results

Upload meter reading results

C S C

Results determined

i n t e r n a l

Check meter reading results

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create meter reading orders

F o r

o n l y

Meter reading due

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-13

Creating Meter Reading Orders z Meter reading orders

z Single order data „

Selection using the meter reading unit, contract, installation or device

„

Additional dates for billing control

z Mass order data

o n l y

C S C

b y

Mass meter reading orders

„

Selection via From meter reading unit and To meter reading unit

„

Schedule task in task management

z Specification of meter reading reason

Manual meter reading due

MDE meter reading due

Print meter reading documents

Download meter reading data

Read meter

Read meter

Enter meter reading results

Upload meter reading results

Results determined

Check meter reading results

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

„

Output meter reading orders

i n t e r n a l

„ You can influence order creation using three control IDs: • Include meter reading category schedule record

- If you select this field, the system checks whether a meter reading order or meter reading result already exists in the meter reading interval. If it does, the system suppresses the meter reading order that has the lower priority. - Deselecting this field speeds up meter reading order creation. An order is always created, even if you have defined meter reading reason priorities for interval checks in Customizing. • Ignore contracts - If you select this field and then recreate billing-relevant meter reading orders, contracts that have already had meter reading orders created for them are not re-analyzed or checked again by the system to see if they are complete. This speeds up the process of recreating meter reading orders. • Suppress service orders - If you select this field, the system represses the creation of service orders that are automatically created as a result of Customizing settings in Device Management.

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-14

o n l y

• Meter reading interval check

C S C

- If you select this field, the scheduled meter reading category of the schedule record has priority. This enables you to also prepare meter readings made by customers if the schedule record contains the corresponding meter reading category. You can find further information under meter reading control.

b y

i n t e r n a l

Single meter reading orders

Create meter reading orders

F o r

F o r

„

Meter reading due

Issuing the Meter Reading Orders Output media

• Cover sheet MDE • Meter reading documents

Meter reading due

• Meter reading notification • Card for meter reading by customer

Output meter reading orders

Manual meter reading due

MDE meter reading due

Print meter reading documents

Download meter reading data

Read meter

Read meter

Enter meter reading results

Upload meter reading results

Meter reading information (selection)

„

Street route

„

Notes for the meter reader (dynamic / static)

Results determined

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

Any number of previous meter reading results

C S C

Expected reading with area

F o r

„ „

Check meter reading results

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create meter reading orders

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-15

z

z

„

Upload interface

„

Automatic estimation

Meter reading due

Manual „

Fast entry

Š Fast entry without correction Š Fast entry with correction „

Single entry

„

Result correction

Š Plausible results Š Implausible results

C S C

z

Meter reading by customer „

Via the Internet

„

Via WAP telephone

Create meter reading orders

Output meter reading orders

Manual meter reading due

MDE meter reading due

Print meter reading documents

Download meter reading data

Read meter

Read meter

Enter meter reading results

Upload meter reading results

Results determined

i n t e r n a l

Check meter reading results

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Automatic

F o r

o n l y

Types of Result Entry

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-16

Result Entry Data z

C S C

„

Check digit

Meter reading data „

Recorded meter reading

„

Date and time of meter reading

„

Meter reader's notes

„

Meter reading type (such as meter reading by the utility company, by the customer, or estimation)

„

Meter reader number

„

Date and time of maximum reading

Functions „

Correction and release of meter reading results

„

Estimation of meter reading results

 SAP AG 2003

Output meter reading orders

Manual meter reading due

MDE meter reading due

Print meter reading documents

Download meter reading data

Read meter

Read meter

Enter meter reading results

Upload meter reading results

Results determined

Check meter reading results

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Entry number

Create meter reading orders

i n t e r n a l

z

„

Meter reading due

F o r

o n l y

z

Reference to meter reading order (fast entry)

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-17

Checking Meter Reading Results: Overview

z

z

„

Manual

„

Automatic

Types of validation „

Fixed checks

„

Independent checks

„

Dependent checks

Output meter reading orders

Manual meter reading due

MDE meter reading due

Print meter reading documents

Download meter reading data

Read meter

Read meter

Enter meter reading results

Upload meter reading results

Correction Correction and release of meter reading results

„

Estimation of meter reading results

„

Correction aids

C S C

„

Results determined

i n t e r n a l

Check meter reading results

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create meter reading orders

F o r

o n l y

z

Entry of meter reading results

Meter reading due

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-18

o n l y

Correction aids Device: 4711000

Result plausible

Meter reading: 78133 Independent checks

Examples: • Consumption from previous period • Demand from previous periods • Demand compared with agreed demand

Dependent checks Examples: • Cosine phi for energy/demand • Usage hours • Control meters

z

Checks can be configured for individual customers and customer groups

z

Permitted deviations between measured values and target values can be configured using tables

z

Return control/monitoring of implausible results

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Result implausible

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Check Meter Reading Results: Process

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-19

Monitoring Meter Readings z Selection of meter reading orders using the following data objects: Contract

„

Installation

„

Device

„

Portion

„

MR unit

„

Business partner

„

Billing order

„

Meter reading orders

„

Meter reading results

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

z Display (single or all):

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-20

Meter Reading: Special Functions:

z Meter reading organization: Scheduling

„

Street route

z Meter reading procedure „

Processing the meter reading

„

Checking of meter reading results

„

Extrapolation of meter reading results

„

Meter reading by customer via the Internet

„

Reversal function

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

z Special functions

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-21

Meter Reading by Customers over the Internet

l ai m E

Meter Meter reading reading request request Internet Internet Transaction Transaction server server Customer Customer

Entry Entry of of meter meter data data

Internet Internet customer customer

Internet Internet

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

Read meters

F o r

Energy Energy supplier supplier

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

IS-U/ IS IS-U/ CCS CCS

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-22

Meter Reading by Customer over WAP Telephone

W

IS-U/ IS IS-U/ CCS CCS

AP

sf an Tr m er

er et re gs in ad

Internet Internet Transaction Transaction server server

Customer Customer Read meters

Energy Energy supplier supplier

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Wireless Wireless Application Application Protocol Protocol

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Internet Internet customer customer

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-23

Reversing Meter Reading Orders: Process

Incorrect mass selection

Reverse meter reading order

Incorrect single selection

Correct Selection

Meter reading order deleted

Restart order creation

New meter reading order

o n l y

F o r

• Meter reading orders • Meter reading results (optional)

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ When a meter reading is reversed, all objects that were generated by the meter reading order creation and meter reading result entry are deleted.

b y

• Billing orders „ A reversal is necessary, for example, if you realize that the specifications from scheduling were incorrect after periodic meter reading orders have been created for a meter reading unit. Or if you entered the wrong device when creating a control meter reading order. „ On the initial screen, you can specify whether the meter reading results are to be: • Deleted - This means that new meter reading orders are created for all devices during repeated meter reading order creation. • Not deleted - This means that during meter reading order creation, meter reading orders are only created for devices that have not been read. If a device has already been read, the corresponding meter reading results are included.

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-24

o n l y

F o r

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Meter Reading: Unit Summary

z Scheduled meter readings are controlled via meter reading

units z In meter reading preparation, documents are created for: „ Meter reading by the company via meter reading lists „ Meter reading by the company via MDE „ Meter reading by customer via meter reading cards „ Meter Reading by Customers over the Internet

z Meter reading processing includes:

o n l y

„ Manual fast entry with and without correction

C S C

„ Manual single entry and meter reading estimation

i n t e r n a l

z Configurable validations reduce the potential for error  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

F o r

„ Automatic upload of data from external systems

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-25

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

7-26

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Meter Reading Topic: Meter reading for individual customers At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Describe the organization and the process of meter reading • Carry out single entry of meter reading results With regard to periodic meter reading, the company does not carry out meter reading at all installations. For some customers, carrying out the meter reading themselves is an efficient use of resources.

o n l y

C S C

b y

Business partner TB090110## would like an interim billing for all his/her contracts. Carry out the meter reading for all devices allocated to this business partner using the Customer Interaction Center.

1-4

True or false? 1-4-1

Meter reading orders control the meter reading, billing, and invoicing processes.

1-4-2

Meter reading orders can be output on the printer or via IDoc.

1-4-3

Meter reading results can be entered manually or automatically and are subject to the same validations.

1-4-4

If meter reading results are not available, the meter reading unit cannot be billed.

1-4-5

Validations are always carried out.

IUT110

7-27

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

1-3

C S C

Which objects can the portions be directly or indirectly allocated to?

b y

1-2

u s e

Which meter reading unit(s) is/are contained in the portion T-A-00?

u s e

i n t e r n a l

1-1

© SAP AG

F o r

The customer reports the meter readings either in writing or by phone. A customer service representative records the meter readings by customer and enters these manually in the system.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

7-28

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Meter Reading Topic: Meter reading for individual customers

1-1

Utilities Industry Æ Scheduling Æ Schedule Master RecordÆ Portion Æ Display. • Enter portion T-A-00. • Choose Save Enter. • The planned billing date is stored in the Sched BD field. This is valid for all meter reading units assigned to this portion.

o n l y

• You can view the list of the meter reading units assigned by choosing the Whereused list pushbutton or CTRL+F4.

C S C

• By expanding the sub-tree Portion in MR units, you can view all the meter reading units that belong to this portion. 1-2

The following relationships can exist: • The portion is entered directly in the meter reading unit.

u s e

• The portion can be specified as an alternative portion directly in the contract.

i n t e r n a l

b y

F o r

• The portion is indirectly referenced via the meter reading unit in the installation.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-29

1-3

• Call the CIC and select the data for your business partner TB090110##. Choose Enter until the data is displayed in the navigation area. Carry out this step for each utility contract • To enter the meter readings for each contract, proceed as follows: - Select a contract. - Choose the action Enter customer meter reading. - Confirm the entry of: Meter reading reason

Meter reading type 02 Meter reading by customer. - Choose F8.

o n l y

- Enter the meter readings, even if the values are implausible (i.e. very high or very low). -

Select a register line

-

Choose the Correct button.

-

You can read the expected values in the MR data and Consump.data fields.

-

The reading can be corrected in the Current MR field.

-

To release a meter reading, choose Release.

-

You return to the screen where you can enter meter readings.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

• To correct meter readings, proceed as follows:

i n t e r n a l

- Save the meter readings. - Complete the customer contact and save.

b y

- You return to the CIC. - Repeat the above steps for the other utility contracts.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

02 Interim reading with billing

F o r

1-4 1-4-1

False. The meter reading order is an organizational aid for preparing for meter readings, collecting data and creating the meter reading documents.

1-4-2

True.

1-4-3

True.

1-4-4

False. Missing meter reading results can be estimated by mass runs.

1-4-5

True. There are fixed validations, which are always checked, such as implausible previous meter reading results and deviations where the installation is inactive or disconnected, or where devices have not been installed. All other independent and dependent validations can be classified into validation groups in Customizing. The validations can then be carried out automatically.

© SAP AG

IUT110

7-30

o n l y

F o r

Proceed as follows:

Billing Master Data

Contents: z Billing master data „

Overview of billing master data

„

Connection to business objects

„

Rate type and rate category

„

Rates, operands, and schemas

„

Prices

F o r

o n l y

z Rate Structure

z Rate determination

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

z Rate allocation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-1

Billing Master Data: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Explain the function of rate master data: Billing class

„

Operands and operand values

„

Rate type and rate category

„

Prices

o n l y

z Define the rate structure: „

Components of the rate

„

Variant programs in the schema

„

Rate determination

F o r

C S C

z Describe rate allocation

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-2

Sales & Distribution

MM

C

SAP Business partner

E&

V S ER

Device Management

CO

MM

Asset Management & Materials Management

• Link to master data • Rate type, rate categ. • Rate definition, prices • Operands, schemas

Premise External entry • Rate Premise determination Entry Systems

Customer External information system Sales Systems Standard R/3 of IS-U Standard R/3 Components

i n t e r n a l

AM

C S C

R

S TOM E

Sales Rate Struc Structture ure Systems

F o r

SD

PM/ CS

Installation services

B

Billing/ Invoicing

E

A/R + A/P (FI-CA)

Plant Maintenance & Service Management

IS-U/CCS IS-U/CCS as as an an integrated integrated component component of of the the SD R/3 enterprise R/3 enterprise Sales & information information system system Distribution External

Contract

IC

Financial Accounting

R

GIS, CAD, SCADA

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

SD

FI

CA

o n l y

Billing Master Data: Overview

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-3

Billing Master Data: Introduction

z Billing master data enables you to specify contract billing rules for both residential and commercial and industrial customers and provides the basis for a complete modeling of rates. z The flexible universal structuring of rates allows you to implement new and creative sales and marketing concepts. SAP Utilities

z An open architecture allows you to adapt and succeed in a changing environment.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-4

Billing Master Data: Business Scenario

z Sales and marketing requirements „

Description of new products and market segments

z Utilities industry „

Specification, checking and release of new contracts

„

Creation of rate category and rate type

„

Definition of rates, prices, and discounts

„

Maintenance of agreed special conditions

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z Customizing of billing master data

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-5

z Billing of contracts for residential as well as commercial and industrial customers z Supports billing procedures for international utility management, such as periodic, interim and period-end billing, floating backbilling, final billing, budget, average monthly and equalized billing, and so on. z Open to new billing procedures z Third party billing and cross-company code billing z Special features: Examples include thermal gas billing, billing for external generators and installations without a meter.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Billing of Utility Services

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-6

o n l y

C S C

b y

FI-CA Document

Contract A/R + A/P

Billing document (utility)

Contract (utility)

Customer contact

Point of delivery

Installation

Premise

Connection object

Device category

Device

Device location

Equipment Connection

IS-U IS-U FI-CA FI FI-CA SD, SD, CS, CS, PM PM

Rate-relevant information

Register

Cross Cross appl. appl.  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Regional structure

i n t e r n a l

„ The installation, the device, and the register contain information relevant to the rate. „ The installation contains:

b y

• Billing class

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Business partner

F o r

• Rate category „ The device contains: • Rate type

o n l y

F o r

Business Objects: Rate Allocation

• Fact group • Price class „ The register also contains: • Rate type • Fact group • Price class

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-7

Rate Allocation: Overview

Installation

Price class Fact group Device

o n l y

C S C

b y

z Together, the rate type and the rate category determine the rate used for billing

Rate type

z The fact group contains values relevant to billing. z The price class determines the rental price in conjunction with the price level.

Price class Fact group Register

Rate type

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Billing class

i n t e r n a l

„ Billing class: Classification of installations, for example, for residential customers or commercial and industrial customers.

b y

„ Rate type Classification of a register, flat rate or reference value for billing The rate type is used in conjunction with the rate category to determine the rate.

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-8

o n l y

„ Rate category Classification of an installation for billing. The rate category is used in conjunction with the rate type to determine the rate. In the rate category, you establish the criteria for billing which govern the rates. These criteria can, for example, control the period-end billing or calculation of the budget billing.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

z The rate category influences indirect rate determination

Rate category

F o r

F o r

z Installations are classified for billing via the billing class

Contract per division

Rate category category

Rate Rate type type

Allocates A particular rate category and rate type for a particular period

Household rate Water, ... ....

0 1 m3 water . . 3.5 4.00 Monthly rent . ....

F o r

i n t e r n a l

to a rate.

„ The rate is determined dynamically (at runtime) from the rate type of the register and the rate category of the installation.

b y

„ Rate determination is managed historically. „ This has the advantage that rate changes can be performed easily. You are then not required to change the rate types and rate categories in the master data. Instead, a new rate is determined starting at a new from-date.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Rate Determination

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-9

Billing Class I z Classifies installations within a division, for example residential/nonresidential contract z Can be valid for several rate categories z Used for plausibility checks in scheduling and in the billing master data z Enables several franchise fee groups to be defined z Can be used as a statistical criterion z If you change the billing class, you must also change the rate category, but you do not have to perform final billing

o n l y

F o r

„ The billing class classifies installations for billing. „ The billing class is also used for the following purposes:

• As a statistical criterion, for example in the sales statistics.

C S C

• For consistency verifications between the master data and billing master data. For example, you can verify that a residential customer's installation has not been allocated to a nonresidential contract.

b y

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-10

z Valid for one division only z Belongs to a single billing class z Contains one valid billing schema z Controls billing - used to determine the rate in conjunction with the rate type z Determines which outsorting checks occur during billing z Controls accompanying backbilling and period-end billing for nonresidential customers z Controls advance billing and dynamic period control

F o r

i n t e r n a l

• Household rate • Commercial rate

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ The billing class classifies installations for billing. The rate category is used in conjunction with the rate type to determine the rate. Examples of rates are:

b y

• Commercial rate with demand measurement • Industrial rate

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

• Minimal consumption rate • Basic price rate 1 • Basic price rate 2 • Domestic water • Reserve water • Water for fire fighting „ Rate determination: • rate type + rate category = rate

© SAP AG

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Rate Category I

IUT110

8-11

Rate Category II

Division Billing Schema

Dynamic Period Control

Billing class

Rate category

Advance Billing

o n l y

F o r

C S C

b y

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ The rate category contains data that controls the processing of billing data. This includes: • Billing Schema

b y

• Control of period-end billing and accompanying backbilling • Outsorting checks

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-12

o n l y

„ Any other billing-relevant data is also saved in the rate category. This includes any agreed quantities, demand, prices, or flat rates. In the case of flat rate services (such as cable services and street lights), no quantities are measured. You must therefore define replacement values that the system can use for evaluation (for example number of cable connections or number of street lights with a specific connection value).

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Backbilling Period-End Billing

Notes

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Outsorting Group

z Used to classify „

Registers

„

Devices

„

Flat rates

„

Reference values

for billing z Examples: peak and off-peak rates for active energy; peak rate for reactive energy; peak rate for active power; gas and water consumption; flat-rate installations z The rate category is used in conjunction with the rate type to determine the rate.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ In exceptional cases you can allocate the rate type to the following objects:

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Generally, you enter the rate type in the register. Examples of rate categories are peak and off-peak rates for active energy, peak rates for reactive energy, peak rates for active power, as well as gas and water consumption.

b y

• Device - For devices without registers (such as ripple control receivers) you can use the rate type to find special rates. Using these, you can calculate a device-based clearing price.

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Definition of Rate Type

• Facts - Used to determine rates that cannot be derived from registers. - Also used to determines rates for flat rate installations without installed devices. • Reference values - Used to model street lights, for example

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-13

Rate Structure Rate

z The rate forms the basis for the billing rule for a device, register, or reference value (facts)

Operand

Rate steps

z Individual rate steps apply billing rules, control account determination and the creation of billing line items, and take into account the franchise fee.

Operand category

Variant programs

z Billing rules have been implemented in the variant programs. z Operands are the input and output parameters of the variant programs.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Technology

F o r

o n l y

Business Objects: Rate Structure

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-14

z Billing rule for a device, register, or reference value (facts), that is, all billing-related steps performed during billing. z These steps are represented by one or more variant programs for which the execution sequence is specified in the billing schema. z The rate can be permissible for one of the following: „

Register

„

Device

„

Reference value (facts)

z Rate steps affect account determination and the creation of billing line items.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

• How measured consumption values are extrapolated or divided up during the meter reading data process and prorations • Which technical billing values are measured by a register

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Rates specify:

• Which reference values are billed (for example, for flat-rate services)

o n l y

• Which calculation formulas the measured values or reference values are used in • Which prices are used • Which constants, factors and influencing values are included in the calculation • Which general ledger accounts the calculation (bill line items) results are posted to • How the bill line items are statistically treated • The division and billing classes the rate is allocated to

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Rate

8-15

o n l y

*

QUANTITY FACTOR QUANTITY FACTOR Calculates Calculates x% x% of of aa quantity quantity

QUANTITY QUANTITY

Variant Variant pool pool

.. .. ..

0.5 *0.5 REACT_KWH REACT_KWH - ACT_50% ACT_50% BILL_REACT BILL_REACT USD 0.06 * USD0.06

ACT_KWH ACT_KWH

.. .. .. NUMBER DEMAND NUMBER OF OF DEMAND DEMAND PEAKS PEAKS DEMAND Calculates Calculates NN peak peak averages averages DEMAND PRICE BILLING DEMAND PRICE BILLING LINE LINE ITEMS ITEMS Valuates Valuates demand demand with with aa price price

*

.. .. .. QUANTITY QUANTITY

-

QUANTITY QUANTITY

Difference Difference of of two two quantities quantities

ACT_50% ACT_50% BILL_REACT BILL_REACT BILLING BILLING LINE LINE ITEMS ITEMS

QUANTITY QUANTITY

.. .. ..

Contract Contract text: text:

.. .. ..

*

QTY PRICE QTY PRICE Valuates Valuates energy energy with with aa price price

BILLING BILLING LINE LINE ITEMS ITEMS

The The reactive reactive energy energy that that exceeds exceeds 50% of the active energy 50% of the active energy is is valuated valuated using using aa separate separate price. price.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Variant Variant pool pool

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Example: Billing Rule for Electricity

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-16

Rate Structure

Rate

Fact group

Elementary calculation and processing step

Grouping of individual facts allocated to a rate

b y

u s e

„ A rate is a billing rule for a register or a reference value, that is, all billing-related steps executed during billing. „ A rate step is represented by one or more variant programs. These are small, independent programs that perform elementary calculation steps.

C S C

„ Several rate fact groups can be allocated to one rate. In this way, if the same rate is used, the operands can still be filled with different values.

o n l y

„ A rate step is determined by the variant that is being used. „ Variants are small, independent programs that perform elementary calculation steps. „ Many variants calculate values relevant to billing and therefore generate billing line items. Other variants convert values and make the results available to subsequent variants. „ Variants usually have input and output operands which represent the parameters included in the variant. These operands belong to a particular operand category. In the rate, a combination of variants is used to model the billing rules. „ Example of fact group: The rate fact group X contains the rate facts "minimum demand = 20 kW" and "discount rate = 10%". This means that if the customer uses at least 20 kW, he/she receives a discount of 10%.

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Rate step

8-17

Rate Data

Billing class Permissibility

Validation class

Usage type

C S C

Minimum time portion required for extrapolation

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Rate

F o r

o n l y

Division

Register operand

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-18

Data for the Rate Step

Variant program

o n l y

Budget billing debit and credit sub-transactions

Indicator for optional billing step

Statistical rate Input operand(s)and output operand(s)

C S C

b y

Franchise fee group

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Rate step

i n t e r n a l

„ Variants are modules in the rate or in the schema that contain a billing rule. „ A sub-transaction is a key that classifies the line item for account determination and/or the way application-specific programs are processed. Main transactions are broken down into subtransactions.

b y

„ Indicator for optional billing step: schema steps can only be executed in billing if all input operands are provided with values for the entire period that the step covers. If this is not the case, the optional indicator is checked: • If the indicator is set, the schema step is not executed. Processing then continues with the next schema step. „ Input and output operand: symbolic name defined by the company for the allocated values that are used as input and output parameters for variant programs. „ Statistical rate: you must specify a statistical rate for all rate steps that generate billing line items. During billing, the statistical rate is written to the billing line item. This rate key can be used for statistical analyses of billing documents. „ Franchise fee group: company's own grouping of business partners subject to the same franchise fee conditions such as major customers or household customers. „ Fine-tuned control of variants: some variant programs require additional input parameters to define the action of the variant programs. Example: according to settings, a variant that subtracts two values can also create negative differences or suppress them.

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-19

o n l y

• If the indicator is not set, billing of the contract is terminated.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

(additional parameters)

F o r

F o r

Fine-tuned control of variants

Billing debit and credit subtransactions

Structure of the Fact Group

Fact group Operands

o n l y

F o r

Operand values

„ Facts are: • Specific values, for example, 100 kW, or • Keys, for example for prices that are allocated to operands and are valid for a particular period. „ Operands are allocated to the fact group.

o n l y

„ Operands manage the operand values. „ The operand values represent the historically managed characteristics of the operands. „ Example of a fact group: The rate fact group X contains the following rate facts: • minimum demand = 20 kW • discount rate = 10% This means that if the customer uses at least 20 kW, he/she receives a discount of 10%.

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ A fact group is the grouping of individual facts allocated to a rate.

b y

F o r

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

8-20

Operand Data

Determination of the demand peaks Operand category

Rounding rules

C S C

b y

u s e

History management

Unit of measurement

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ The operand category classifies the operands for the variant programs. „ Rounding rules consist of:

b y

• The place to which rounding is carried out:

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Access control

i n t e r n a l

- If you specify a positive value, rounding is performed to that number of places after the decimal point. - If you specify a negative value, rounding is performed to that number of places before the decimal point.

o n l y

F o r

Operands

F o r

o n l y

Division

Weighting key

• The rounding type (the principle used to round): + for rounding up - for rounding down 0 for rounding to the nearest whole number

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-21

Operand category

Description

AMOUNT DEMAND

Amount Services (general)

FACTOR QUANT

Number with decimal places Quantity (general)

QPRICE REFVALUE

Quantity-based price Reference value

SEASON

Season

TPRICE

Time-based price

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ Operands link values to be billed and variant programs. „ An operand is allocated to an operand category and a division. Operand categories determine the functions of the operands The variant program determines which operand categories can be used as input and output operands.

b y

„ The system contains 20 different operand categories.

C S C

„ The operand categories are predefined by SAP and cannot be changed.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Operand Categories/Examples

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-22

Rate Determination - Operands

Operand categories

Operands

Operand values

• Predefined

• Determined individually

• Provide operands with values

• Serve as the parameters for variant programs

• Define actual values

• Control processing via variant programs

o n l y

F o r

„ In the following objects, you can allocate values to the operands: • rate facts

b y

• Rate category facts

C S C

• Installation facts • Dynamic determination at billing runtime

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-23

Hierarchy

Installation facts have

Price A 0.55

priority over

Rate category facts have

Price B 0.60

priority over Price C 0.70

„ At rate fact and rate category fact levels, you can also enter replacement values. These replacement values give you more flexibility when allocating operand values. „ You can also historically overwrite operand values. In this way, you can allocate a different price key to an installation for a certain period of time. For the rest of the time, the system uses the values from the installation facts.

„ In the rate facts and rate category facts, you define general operand values. These apply to groups of customers. An installation fact level, you define individual values, such as connection values and number of persons.

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-24

o n l y

„ If no operand value can be determined during billing, the system cancels billing and outputs an error in the application log. This does not happen if the rate step is optional.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Operand values are stored in the rate facts and apply on rate level. Cross-rate operand values can also be defined in the rate category facts and installation facts. They have priority over the rate facts.

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Rate facts and rate fact groups

F o r

o n l y

Allocation of Operand Values

Schema 1

z Valid for a particular division z Valid for a specific billing class z Contains one or more rates z Establishes the sequence of the billing rate steps

„

Billing line item relevant to posting

„

Billing line item relevant to statistics

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ A schema is a structure that defines the sequence in which variant programs of the rates to be billed are executed.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z Indicator can be set for:

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-25

Schema 2

z Dependent on the rate category in the installation z Influences sorting of the billing line items on the bill form z Controls the grouping of billing line items

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-26

z Quantity-based price For quantities and consumption z Flat rate Fixed amounts per unit of time (consumption flat rates and flat-rate amounts) z Clearing price For the use of a measuring device over a certain period of time z Time-based price For demand and connection values

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ The price categories are predefined by SAP and cannot be changed. „ The price categories are used internally to control data processing. Normally, you create the prices based on the rate. In this case, the correct rate is proposed by the system.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Price Categories

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-27

Price Types

z Standard price Price independent of quantity z Block price One or more prices dependent on consumption z Scale price Quantity-based price

o n l y

F o r

„ The prices type determines how to use the price. „ In addition to standard prices, you can also use block and scale prices.

F o r

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-28

o n l y

„ Price blocks define consecutive quantity areas (for demand and/or energy) to which different prices apply. This avoids that excessive consumption becomes cheaper than limited consumption.

C S C

„ The scaling of the price defines subsequent quantity area (for demand and/or energy), to which, if exceeded, a different price for the entire quantity. In this way, excessive consumption can cost as little as limited consumption.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Rate Structure Data relating to customer and installation

Prices and rate facts

Contract

Installation

Ra ca te te go ry

Rate deterpe mination

o n l y

Quantity conversion and proration

Rate n

Execution of variant programs according to schema

Schema 1 Var.pr. Values

Rate 1 - Step 1 VarProg. A - Step 2 VarProg. B . . Rate 2

x1 x2 .

- Step 1 VarProg. A - Step 2 VarProg. C - Step 3 VarProg. D . . . . . . . .

x3 x4 x5 . . . .

Rate n - Step 1 VarProg. A

E X E C U T B O N

xxx

Validation of billing results

Generation of billing line items

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Rate

Rate 1

Inst. Inst. structure structure ty Rate te Rate cat. cat. facts/ facts/ a R Installation Installation facts facts

Data entry and analysis

Procedure data

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Rate data

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-29

Rate Structure II

Installation Installation structure structure

Rate Rate type type + Price Price

Rate Rate

Variant Variant program program

Billing Billing Schema Schema

Var. Var. prog.: prog.: Quantity Quantity xx Price Price Basic Basic price price

Operand Operand values values

Rate Rate category category facts facts Rate Rate facts facts

H H ii ee rr aa rr cc hh yy

Operand Operand value: value: 1500 1500 KWh; KWh; 0.15 0.15 USD USD 30 30 USD USD // year year

i n t e r n a l

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-30

o n l y

i n t e r n a l

„ Operands are mnemonic variables determined by the utility company. The rate allocates values to the operands, for example, prices or services. The operand values are input and output parameters for variant programs. The billing guidelines - rules stipulated in the contract - are stored in the variant programs (for example, quantity x price). They determine how the billing-related values (such as measured consumption or services) are processed and evaluated. The billing schema consolidates one or more rates and determines in which sequence the rates are to be billed - and, therefore, the variant programs - are used.

C S C

„ The rate is calculated from the rate category and the rate type during rate determination A rate category is allocated to every utility installation. It contains data that controls the processing of meter reading data and billing regardless of the rate used The data can be overwritten by individual entries in the utility installation The rate type specifies the rate allocation of registers and, as a result, is normally stored in the installation. However, it can be stored, for example, in flat-rate installations, the rate category, or in the utility installation. The slide displays how the different parts of contract billing interact with each other.

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Installation Installation facts facts

Rate Rate category category

F o r

Rate Rate 1: 1: Step Step 11 Step Step 22 ... ... Rate Rate nn

Installation Installation

Discounts / Surcharges z The discount category defines a discount or surcharge. z The discount type determines the calculation of: „

Absolute values

„

Relative values

Quantity

„

Price

„

Amount

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

„

F o r

o n l y

z The reference defines how the discount is applied:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-31

Billing Master Data: Unit Summary

z Billing master data is classified by: Billing class

„

Rate category

„

Rate type

o n l y

z The rate consists of: „

Variants, which are provided with operands

„

A schema, which determines the processing sequence of the variants

„

Prices, discounts, and surcharges

C S C

„

i n t e r n a l

z Indirect rate determination

F o r

Reduced maintenance of data in the case of rate changes

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-32

Exercises Unit: Billing Master Data Topic: Rate Structure At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Describe the elements and the structure of a rate. • Carry out a price change for a particular key date. • Adjust the budget billing amount to the business partner. Provide information to customers on rates and price calculations.

Which rate category is defined for the customer installations of business partner TB110110##?

b y

1-1-1

______________________________________________________

u s e

______________________________________________________ 1-1-2

Water ______________________________________________________

b y

______________________________________________________ 1-2

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Electricity

u s e

Which devices and registers are billed to the business partner? Enter the device and register numbers. 1-2-1

Electricity

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

1-1

______________________________________________________ 1-2-2

Water ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-33

1-3

1-3-1

1-3-2

1-4

Device level:

________________________________________

Register level:

________________________________________

Water Device level:

________________________________________

Register level:

________________________________________

Determine the rate for the rate category from task 1-1 and the rate types from task 1-3. Division

Rate category

Rate type

Rate determined

o n l y

Electricity Electricity

C S C

Water

1-5

i n t e r n a l

b y

Electricity

F o r

Provide information on the electricity rate E1_1. 1-5-1

Where is the rate permissible? __________________________________________________ The rate is composed of which components? Name the variant program and describe its functions.

b y

i n t e r n a l

1-5-2

u s e

u s e

Which rate types are assigned at device and register level to the business partner for the divisions below?

_____________________________________________________

C S C

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________

o n l y

F o r

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 1-5-3

Which operands belong to the rate fact group? What do they mean? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

1-5-4

What is the energy price? ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-34

1-6

(Optional) The consumption of the flat-rate installation for business partner TB010110xx has increased. As a result, the utility installation must be extended by installing an additional meter. Extend the flat-rate electricity installation by installing a meter using today’s date and the following details: Connection object: Device location: Installation: New device:

TB010110## TB010112DL0## TB010130## TB010130## with installed meter reading250

Only allocate household rate data at register level Note that you must adapt the billing-relevant data for the installation to the new circumstances before the device is installed to ensure that billing and the billing-related installation of the device are correct. To do this, you must allocate a suitable rate category to the installation (for example, ‘E1’ because it is no longer a flat-rate installation since the meter has been installed) and limit the installation facts.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-35

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

8-36

IUT110

© SAP AG

Unit: Billing master data Topic: Rate structure

1-1

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Utilities Industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center Go to Info and choose Customer overview. The rate category can be found at the bottom of the screen. Alternatively, you can double-click the installation(s) in the navigation area. Display (from the customer environment, for example) the individual utility installations for a business partner (by double-clicking). Then: Devices.

1-3

Display (from the customer environment, for example) the individual utility installations for a business partner (by double-clicking). Then: Billing view.

You can access rate determination under: Utilities Industry -> Billing -> Master Data -> Define rate determination Rate type

Rate determined

Electricity

E1

1001

E1_1

Electricity

E1

1002

E1_2

Water

W1

3001

W1_1

© SAP AG

IUT110

o n l y

Rate category

C S C

Division

b y

i n t e r n a l

1-4

u s e

You can find the rate types for the devices under Rate types.

u s e

b y

C S C

1-2

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Identify and display the data of business partner TB110110## in the CIC.

F o r

o n l y

Solutions

8-37

1-5

Display the business partner installation. Select the button ‘Billing Periods’. You can find the rates on the tab page Rates. Select the Rate. 1-5-1

This information is located under Permissibility.

1-5-2

Choose Rate steps. For a description of the variants, choose Environment → Variant documentation.

1-5-3

To do this, click on Facts in the Display Rate screen. You are now looking at the operands. You can display the operand values by pressing Expand. You can use the color legend here. To do this, choose Utilities → Color legend.

1-5-4

Double-click on the operand values. For block and scale prices, you need to double-click again on the price.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-38

1-6

First, call up the flat-rate installation of business partner TB010110xx: Select the flat-rate installation in the navigation area. Choose rate maintenance (right mouse click).

o n l y

u s e

Enter the initial data: Connection object Device location: Installation: Activity Date: New device:

TB010110## TB010112DL0## TB010130## Today’s date TB010130##

b y

To continue processing, press Enter. 02 Installation extension 250 1000 1002 Off-peak active energy 0001 Residential customer

o n l y

Enter the Activity Date: Activity reason: Meter reading recorded: Period consumption: Rate type Fact grp.:

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Device Installation Æ Installation Æ Full

u s e

F o r

The installation is now ready for billing-related device installation.

i n t e r n a l

b y

Choose the following for device installation:

F o r

Transfer the settings using the Transfer button and then save the changes to the installation.

C S C

Choose the time slice overview and enter today’s date as the selection date. Activate the Prorate indicator and choose the newly created time slice by double-clicking on it. A new time slice for the installation data relevant to billing opens automatically. The rate category entered (E4) was defined as the rate category for flat-rate installations and is only suitable for the rate types set down in the (installation) facts. Since another rate has to be found for the device installed, a rate category that matches a rate type at device or register level must be specified. For this reason, change the rate category in the current time slice to “E1”. To ensure that your billing is correct, you must also specify the validity of the previous rate type in the installation facts. To do this, choose the Facts button. On the following screen, select the rate type by double-clicking on it. Limit the period of validity to the day prior to the installation of the device. (You may have to delete another automatically generated continuation line, before you can transfer the settings).

Activate the indicator for payment of rental and clearing charges. Save your entries.

© SAP AG

IUT110

8-39

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

8-40

IUT110

© SAP AG

Billing and Invoicing

Contents: z Billing Overview

„

Basic components of billing

„

Special functions

„

Overview

„

Invoicing functions

„

Creation of contract accounts receivable and payable (FI-CA) and print documents

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

z Invoicing

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-1

Billing and Invoicing: Course Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the billing process „

Billing procedure, simulation

„

Credit memo, manual backbilling

„

Outsorting, billing reversal

„

Invoicing tasks and procedure

„

Special features of invoicing

„

Use of invoicing documents

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z Explain the invoicing process

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-2

Billing Contents z Overview Billing procedures and special functions

„

Billing and simulation procedures

„

Design of billing rules

o n l y

z Basic components of billing „

Scheduled dates and periods

„

Billing procedures

„

Billing and simulation

„

Document display

F o r

C S C

z Special billing functions „

Credit memo, manual backbilling

„

Outsorting, reversal

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-3

Billing: Introduction

z Contract billing of the supply and services provided is the most important function of a utility company. z Integrated processing of both residential and commercial and industrial customers requires several billing rules. SAP Utilities

z Increased competition requires the billing process to be flexible and efficient.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Different types of simulation enable the correct billing to be performed.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-4

Billing: Business Scenario

z Move-out processing in the customer center „

Move-out date and meter readings reported by telephone

„

Implausible meter reading requires meter reading by the company

z Meter reading processing „

Create meter reading order

„

Enter or estimate meter reading results

o n l y

Final billing, followed by invoicing

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

„

F o r

z Start of billing and invoicing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-5

IS-U/CCS: Billing

Business partner Residential customer

Water/ Electricity Waste water

Commercial and industrial customer

Consumption services Flat rates

o n l y

Energy suppliers

Gas

Charges Taxes Duties

District heating

Cable television Multimedia

F o r

C S C

Billing rules, variants

.. .. ..

Price Price adjustment adjustment

Discounts, Discounts, surcharges surcharges

General General Duties Duties

Proration Proration

Franchise Franchise Duties Duties

i n t e r n a l

.. .. ..

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Divisions

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-6

o n l y

Special functions Î Interim billing

Î Month-based

Î Outsorting for bill verification

Î Key date

Î Simulation

Î Period

Î Manual backbilling

Î To the day

Î Manual credit memo

Î Season-based

Î Reversal

Î Comparative

Î Unbilled revenue reporting

(Most favorable billing) Î For employees Î Rolling (back-billing, final

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Billing procedures:

F o r

billing)  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing Procedure: Overview

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-7

o n l y

Billing

Invoicing Billing order processing that involves valuating consumption and services for individual contracts, and creating billing documents for invoicing.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Meter reading

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Definition of Billing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-8

Billing Tasks

Determination and conversion of quantities

Determination of billing periods

Billing

Valuation of quantities with prices

F o r

o n l y

Determination of change date and proration to that date

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Creation of billing documents for invoicing

Determination of • Rate data • Price data

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-9

z Length of period for periodic billing „

x days; 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 months

z Length of period for period-end billing „

x + x days; 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 months

MO

TU WE TH

FR

SA SU

1 8 15 21 28

2 9 16 22 29

5 12 19 25

6 13 20 26

3 10 17 23 30

4 11 18 24 31

7 14 21 27

z Billing for an exact number of days „

based on the date of the meter reading

z Month-based billing „

dependent on key date

F o r

z Month-based billing dependent on intervals

i n t e r n a l

„

„ The billing period for which the utility bills the customer can be determined in a number of ways. These are: „ For an exact number of days Determines the exact length of the billing period in days, for example the period between the last billed meter reading and the current day of meter reading.

C S C

„ Month-based Bills a specific number of complete months. If the case of a move-in or move-out, the month-based procedure can be billed based on the number of days.

b y

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Billing Periods

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-10

o n l y

Recurring periodic billing

z Floating backbilling

Special form of monthly periodic billing in which backbilling is performed for previous months using a current value Example: monthly comparison of n peak averages

z Period-end billing

After completion of the billing cycle Example: 13th billing, backbilling for a year

z Interim billing

Unscheduled billing at any time Example: initiated by customer request

z Final billing

Examples: customer move-out or termination of contract; service territory transfer

i n t e r n a l

C S C

z Periodic billing

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Forms of Billing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-11

z Best-rate billing

The most favorable rate is chosen for the customer on the basis of several billing rules.

z Quantity-based rate for basic price

The annual quantity consumed is used to determine the billing rule that applies.

z Demand-based rate determination

The measured demand is used to determine the billing rule that applies.

z Season-based billing

F o r

Examples: Different prices for each season, different billing rules for each season.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Special Forms of Billing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-12

Portion 1 27.7.

28.7.

31.7.

1.8.

2.8.

3.8.

Meter reading period for MR unit 1

End End of of

Billing period

MR MR period period

Meter reading period for MR unit 2

Scheduled MR date

for all MR units Meter reading period for MR unit 3

2001 2001

2002 2002

Portion 1 27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7.

1.8.

2.8.

Portion 1 27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7.

3.8.

Meter reading

1.8.

2.8.

3.8.

Meter reading Billing

C S C

b y

u s e

30.7.

Billing

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ End of the billing period: Portions should be billed for the first time on this date. The length of the scheduled billing period (period length) in conjunction with this date determine the date of the next billing.

u s e

„ Scheduled billing date: • Date on which billing of contracts that belong to a particular portion should begin.

• The SAP calendar is used for this. „ End of the meter reading period: Used as the baseline date for determining the schedules of the following meter reading periods. This date may not be later than the end of the billing period for the allocated portion. „ Scheduled meter reading date: Date on which all extrapolations and estimations are performed.

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-13

o n l y

• This date is calculated as follows during generation of the schedule records: Date of the end of the billing period of the schedule record, minus the number of days between the end of the billing period and the scheduled billing date of the schedule master record.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

29.7.

i n t e r n a l

F o r

End of Sched. billing period

Scheduled billing date

F o r

o n l y

Generation of Schedule Records

Billing Process: Overview

MR Order creation

Billing order

MR order

Plausible MR results

o n l y

Billing order

b y

C S C

Implausible MR results

Invoicing

Billing document

Bill printout

Bill printout

MR correction

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Billing

F o r

„ Meter reading order creation: Meter reading orders are created per register „ Billing orders are created for each contract.

b y

„ A billing order is automatically created with the meter reading order. However, the billing order does not have a billable status. The billing order can only be billed once plausible meter reading results have been entered.

F o r

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-14

o n l y

„ The billing order is deleted during billing. The billing process creates a billing document that is the basis of invoicing.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

MR entry

Universal Billing Engine Data relating to customer and installation

Prices and rate facts

Contract

Installation

Ra t e cate g

ory

Rate determination

o n l y

Rate 1

Quantity conversion and proration

Execution of variant programs according to schema

Schema 1 Var.pr. Values

Rate 1 - Step 1 VarProg. A - Step 2 VarProg. B . . Rate 2

x1 x2 .

- Step 1 VarProg. A - Step 2 VarProg. C - Step 3 VarProg. D . . . . . . . .

x3 x4 x5 . . . .

Rate n - Step 1 VarProg. A

E X E C U T B O N

xxx

Validation of billing results

Generation of billing line items

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Rate

Rate n

Inst. Inst. structure structure pe ty Rate Rate cat. cat. facts/ facts/ te a Installation Installation facts facts R

Data entry and analysis

Procedure data

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Rate data

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-15

General Billing Functions

Decision variants Energy price

Season-based values and variants

C S C

b y

u s e

Block and scale prices

Service price

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ Energy price Measured or calculated consumption is valuated using energy charges. For example:

b y

• Adjustment of calculated consumption over the course of the billing period • Comparison with maximum/minimum purchase quantities and further processing of difference quantities • Breakdown/valuation of energy quantities using different percentage rates or time criteria

o n l y

„ Demand price Measured or calculated demand is valuated using demand prices. The number of the measured demand values used for calculating the demand to be billed is variable. For example: • Comparison with minimum demand, maximum demand, or other demand established in the contract, and further processing of the difference demand (such as excess demand) • Breakdown and valuation of demand using different percentage rates „ Service price Any number of demand replacement values can be valuated with time-based prices for the supplying of energy. The demand replacement values can also be levied as a flat rate. „ Block and scale prices „ Season-based values and variants „ Decision variants

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Best-rate billing

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Billing

F o r

o n l y

Demand price

Usage hours

9-16

Special Billing Functions

Determination of taxes, duties, and charges

Billability check

Billing

Energy feeding from small power producers

F o r

o n l y

Consideration of register relationships

Billing of company and plant consumption

Manual credit memos and backbilling

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-17

o n l y

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Processing steps: z

The billing order is deleted and cannot be billed again

z

Meter reading results cannot be changed again

z

Billing

Billing chosen

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

Description:

ISIS-U

Creation of billing documents used only for further processing in invoicing

Choose billing type

Check billing documents

Billing types

Description:

Enter selection criteria

Creation of simulation documents that are only used for further processing in invoicing simulation Simulation

Processing steps: z

Billing order is retained and and can still be used for simulation

z

Meter reading results can still be changed

z

Simulation document is created

Billing document is created

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Choose billing type

Billing date reached

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing and Simulation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-18

o n l y

Enter selection criteria

Billing chosen

Start billing

Simulation

Simulation chosen

Start simulation

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

Description:

ISIS-U

Billing can be simulated without a billing order for any group and for any period of time.

Choose simulation type

Check billing documents

Simulation types Description:

Choose billing type

Billing is simulated on the basis of a billing order that can be processed. Billing simulation

Processing steps:

Processing steps:

z

Simulation period can be freely defined

z

Period is determined by the billing order

z

Extrapolation that takes account of meter reading results

z

Meter reading results relevant to billing are required

z

Valuation of billing

z

Period can already have been billed

z

Billability check

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Billing date reached

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Simulation Types

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-19

Document Types

Billing date reached

Billing chosen

Start billing

Choose billing type

Check documents Simulation chosen

Start simulation

Check billing documents

Simulation

Billing documents implausible

Billing

Outsort documents

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

Description: Simulation document

z

Simulation produces a simulation document

z

Billing produces a billing document

z

Documents the procedure

z

Saves and validates the results

z

Used for further processing of billing line items

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

Purpose

Billing document

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Enter selection criteria

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-20

Document Information

Billing date reached

Billing line items

Start billing

Check documents Simulation chosen

Start simulation

Rate data Documents from • Simulation

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

Price data

o n l y

• Billing

F o r

Device data

Print data

C S C

Meter reading data

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing chosen

Choose billing type

Check billing documents

Internal billing data

Account data

Enter selection criteria

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-21

Further Processing of Documents

Billing date reached

Invoicing

Invoicing simulation

Enter selection criteria

Billing chosen

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Check billing documents

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Choose billing type

Process documents further

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

Documents from • Simulation • Billing

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Outsorting

F o r

Billing reversal

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-22

Outsorting Procedure

Billing date reached

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

o n l y

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

Automatic

Manual

Purpose „

Check special contract billing documents

„

Check new rates Check consumption values in complex installations

„

Bills with a balance of zero

„

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Start simulation

F o r

Check proration for different time slices

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Start billing

Billing documents for a contract for which the outsorting indicator is set are not automatically processed further.

ISIS-U

Š Amount limit Š Bill sum total Š Budget billing „

Simulation chosen

Description:

Possible validations: Percentage or absolute amount that the billing document exceeds or falls below the following:

Billing chosen

Outsort documents

Description:

„

Choose billing type

Check billing documents

Outsort documents Billing documents which have failed validation are outsorted automatically.

Enter selection criteria

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-23

Process of Outsorting

Billing date reached

Billing

Invoicing

Choose billing type

Billing chosen

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Check billing documents

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Check documents

o n l y

Exception list

z

Outsort documents

z

C S C

Release documents

Start invoicing

Billing documents incorrect

Reverse billing

Outsorting reasons „

Failed validation

„

Indicator set in the contract

Further processing „

Reversal

„

Release

i n t e r n a l

Reverse documents

Billing documents correct

Outsort documents

Check simulation documents Start invoicing simulation

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Bill printout

Enter selection criteria

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-24

o n l y

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Only one billing document is reversed. This can occur with or without a subsequent correction bill.

Incorrect meter reading result

„

Technical fault ...

„

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Check simulation documents

Reverse documents

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

More than one document is reversed. Selection takes place using document intervals or lists of individual documents.

ISIS-U

Mass reversal

Individual reversal

Incorrect conditions for nonresidential contract

„

Billing chosen

Description:

Description:

„

Choose billing type

Check billing documents

Reverse billing

Possible reasons:

Enter selection criteria

Possible reasons: „

Incorrect billing group

„

Incorrect rates and prices

„

Incorrect sales tax ...

„

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Billing date reached

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing Reversal

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-25

o n l y

Billing date reached

Reverse billing

Correct data

Restart billing

Enter selection criteria

Choose billing type

Billing chosen

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Check billing documents

Document implausible

Billing documents implausible

Outsort documents

Billing order

16.2.04 Incorrect billing document

23.2.04 Reversed billing document

Check simulation documents

Reverse documents

Billing documents correct

Start invoicing

Billing documents incorrect

Start invoicing simulation

Reverse billing

24.2.04 Corrected billing document Jane Smith

Jane Smith

Jane Smith

Electricity . . . . 900 Gas . . . . . . .1.000 Water . . . . . . . 700

Electricity . . . . 900 Gas . . . . . . 1.000 Water . . . . . . . 700

Total . . . . . 2.600

Total . . . . . . .2.600

Electricity . . . . 600 Gas . . . . . . 1.000 Water . . . . . . . 700

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Document outsorted

F o r

Total . . . . . . . 2.300

Reversal indicator set  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing Reversal Process

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-26

Billing Overview Enter selection criteria

Choose billing type

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Check billing documents

Check simulation documents

Billing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start invoicing

Reverse billing

Start invoicing simulation

 SAP AG 2002 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing documents correct

i n t e r n a l

Billing documents implausible

F o r

o n l y

Billing chosen

C S C

Billing date reached

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-27

Billing: Unit Summary

z Billing processes billing orders, valuates

consumption and demand, and creates billing documents for invoicing. z There are two types of billing: „ Simulation, which creates simulation documents „ Billing, which creates billing documents

z Outsorted billing documents require additional

„ Failed validation „ Indicator set in the contract

i n t e r n a l

C S C

z Individual or mass reversals enable quick correction

and subsequent billing.  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

F o r

o n l y

processing - Documents must be either released or reversed. Reasons for outsorting:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-28

Invoicing: Introduction

z Invoicing links contract billing to contract accounts receivable and payable, and prepares bill printout. z The bill sum total is determined after clearing billing documents against the budget billings already paid, and against the taxes, charges, and duties that are due. SAP Utilities

z Flexible clearing options, such as payments for open items, reduce the amount of manual processing required.

o n l y

F o r

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ The bill sum total is calculated as follows: Bill sum total

=

Total receivables from billing

paid budget billings

-

other credits (credit memo, payment on account)

C S C

-

b y

+ other receivables (backbilling, dunning charge)

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-29

Invoicing: Business Scenario

z Move-out processing in the customer center „

Move-out date and meter readings reported by telephone

„

Implausible meter reading requires meter reading by the company

„

Create meter reading order

„

Enter or estimate meter reading results

F o r

o n l y

z Meter reading processing

z Start of billing and invoicing Final billing, followed by invoicing

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-30

o n l y

Billing

Invoicing The process that links the billing documents to contract accounts receivable and payable, and provides the basis for bill creation.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Meter reading

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Definition of Invoicing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-31

Invoicing: Overview Billing:

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable makes available items relevant for payment and manages the individual accounts.

Invoice-relevant transactions „

Billing documents

„

Credit memos

„

Backbillings

Invoice-relevant transactions ISIS-U

FIFI-CA

„

Open items

„

Paid budget billings

„

Manual postings

„

Dunning charges

„

Payments on account

„

Bill printout

„

Budget billing plan

„

Due date determination

„

Clearing

„

Use of credits

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

Invoicing

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Contract accounts receivable and payable:

Provides the processes relevant to payment and manages the individual accounts.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-32

Tasks of Invoicing

Creation of budget billing plan

Joint invoicing

Cross-company code invoicing

Invoicing

Credit clearing

F o r

o n l y

Account determination

Due date determination

Budget billing clearing

„ Invoicing is used for the following: • Grouping together billing documents of contracts from the same contract account into one joint bill. • Posting documents to FI-CA (sub-ledger accounting)

o n l y

• Supplying bill printout documents for bill creation • Processing budget billing plans

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

F o r

„ Invoicing is the process that integrates contract billing with the Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA) component. It also forms the basis for bill creation.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

9-33

Invoicing Units

Date for invoicing reached

z Creation of invoicing units

Enter selection criteria

Choose invoicing type

Invoicing chosen

Start invoicing Start invoicing

Summary of the billing documents in a contract account can be controlled at contract level. „

Mandatory

Check the FI-CA document

Check bill printout document

Invoicing documents implausible

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Invoicing simulation chosen Start invoicing simulation

Check simulation documents Simulate bill printout

Contracts for which the documents must be invoiced together „

Optional Contracts for which the documents can be invoiced together

„

Exclusive Contracts for which the documents must be invoiced separately

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-34

o n l y

C S C

b y

Billing

Contract Contract 11

Document Document 11 Mandatory Mandatory

Mandatory Mandatory Joint Joint invoice invoice

Invoicing

Contract Contract 22 Mandatory Mandatory Joint Joint invoice invoice

Contract Contract 33

Document Document 33 Mandatory Mandatory

Contract Contract 44

Document Document 44 Optional Optional

Document Document Optional Optional

Contract Contract 55

Document Document 55 Exclusive Exclusive

Document Document Exclusive Exclusive

Mandatory Mandatory Joint Joint invoice invoice

Optional Optional Joint Joint invoice invoice

Exclusive Exclusive invoice invoice

ll Bi

ll Bi

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

„ Contracts 1-3 have a joint invoicing ID This means that a bill is only created when documents are available for all three contracts.

u s e

u s e

Contract account

F o r

b y

„ Contract 4 can - but does not have to be - invoiced with the other contracts. „ Contract 5 is always invoiced separately

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Mandatory and Optional Contracts: 1

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-35

Mandatory and Optional Contracts: 2

Contract account

Contract Contract 22

Document Document 22 Mandatory Mandatory

Contract Contract 33

Document Document 33 Mandatory Mandatory

Contract Contract 44

Document Document 44 Optional Optional

Contract Contract 55

Document Document 55 Exclusive Exclusive

Mandatory Mandatory Joint Joint invoice invoice

Mandatory Mandatory Joint Joint invoice invoice

Optional Optional Joint Joint invoice invoice

o n l y

C S C

Document Document 11 Mandatory Mandatory

Mandatory Mandatory Joint Joint invoice invoice

Exclusive Exclusive invoice invoice

Document Document

ll Bi

Document Document Exclusive Exclusive

ll Bi

i n t e r n a l

Contract Contract 11

Invoicing

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Billing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-36

Invoicing Options

Date for invoicing reached

z SAP billing documents

Enter selection criteria

Choose invoicing type

Invoicing chosen

Start invoicing Start invoicing

„ „ „

IS-U billing documents

Check the FI-CA document

SD billing documents

Check bill printout document

Invoicing documents implausible

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Invoicing simulation chosen Start invoicing simulation

Check simulation documents Simulate bill printout

PM / SM billing documents

z Company code allocation „

Invoicing within a company code

„

Cross-company code invoicing

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-37

Source of Billing Documents

SAP systems:

Invoice-relevant transactions „

IS-U consumption billing

„

SD Sales and Distribution

„

CS Customer Service

Using standard billing documents, billing results from external systems can be invoiced and monitored together with consumption billing results. Ext.

SD ISIS-U CS

Invoice-relevant transactions „

Telecommunications

„

Heating costs billing

„

Other unbundling services

o n l y

Bill

F o r

Jane Smith

....

C S C

. 600 Electricity . . . 1.500 Maintenance .. .. . 700 Tel. com. . . .2.800 Total . . . . . .

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

External systems:

Central invoicing of all processes from consumption billing, sales and distribution and service management simplify the transactions.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-38

o n l y

Supply service #2

Energy feeding #3

Other services #4

Waste Waste water water Waste Waste

Electricity Electricity Water Water Gas Gas

Electricity Electricity connection connection $$ 85 85

Cable Cable TV TV

$$ 50 50 $$ 40 40

Sale

#5

Radiator Radiator $$ 35 35 Maintenance fee #6

Gas Gas pipe pipe $$ 45 45

Simplified Example without tax

$15 $15 $$ 60 60 $$ 80 80

Total charges #4711 Billing (#1-#7) - Paid budget billing amounts(#1-#3) Bill sum total

$ 510 $ 330 $ 180

$$ 30 30

External billing document #7 Service xy $ 70

due on 01/15/2000

Billing summary

Account: A. Smith

IS-U

Billing #4711

- one division for several contracts ("unbundling" electricity rate)

$ 180

Single items per receivable: Billing #1 ... Billing #2 ... ................

- various divisions (electricity, gas, water) SAP applications

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Disposal service #1

F o r

- SD/CS and IS-U invoices Also billing from external systems

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Invoicing Various Services

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-39

o n l y

C S C

b y

Contracts for xy CoCd. 01

Contracts

for "zz" CoCd. 02

Contracts

for "rs" CoCd. 03

ISIS-U

Dep. of works xy: Consumption bill. #1 Electricity 1000 $ Gas 1500 $ Water 600 $

Account Smith (xy) Re. #4711 380,380,- $

General ledger 01 Municipal utility co. xy

Single items per receivable:

req. requirement

Billing #1 (xy) ... Billing #2 (zz) ...

Cross-company code billing for local authority zz: Other services #2 Waste water 500 $ Waste disposal 200 $

Billing #3 (rs) ...

Cross-company code billing for TV company rs: Other Services #3 Cable TV 180 $

General ledger 02Authority "zz"

Gas requirement Water Water

FI-CA General ledger 03 (not relevant for fin. statements)

TV company "rs"

Total charges #4711: Billing (#13980 $ (#1-#3) - Amount paid (#1(#1-#3) -3600 $ Amount outstanding: 380 $ Due on 01.15.04

req. req. Waste disposal Waste disposal Cross-company code billing

req. Cable TV

Third Party Billing

i n t e r n a l

FI

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Total Charges #4711

F o r

„ This is an example of invoicing for different company codes. „ The department of works XY supplies their customers with electricity, gas and water. „ However, XY performs billing on behalf of local authority ZZ for waste water and waste disposal.

C S C

„ XY also performs billing on behalf of cable company RS for cable TV charges.

b y

„ This whole process occurs in the same SAP system, although it involves different companies.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Cross-company code invoicing

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-40

Bill Due Date

Date for invoicing reached

z The bill due date is determined from the following attributes: „ „

Terms of payment These determine the source of the baseline date

Enter selection criteria

Invoicing chosen

Start invoicing Start invoicing

Check the FI-CA document

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Start invoicing simulation

Check simulation documents Simulate bill printout

o n l y

If a bill falls due on a holiday, the bill due date can be corrected to fall on a working day.

„

Can be specified for each company in Customizing

Baseline date + terms of payment = bill due date

i n t e r n a l

„

F o r

Can be differentiated for incoming and outgoing payment

C S C

z Terms of payment „

b y

Invoicing simulation chosen

Baseline date: Posting date, document date, or system date Allocated to the contract account centrally

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Check bill printout document

Invoicing documents implausible

„

„ The bill due date can also be combined with the first budget billing. „ Posting date: Date when a business transaction is transferred to one or more accounting ledgers on document entry. „ System date: Date when a document is created in the system. This date is automatically specified by the system.

C S C

„ Document date: Creation date of original document (for example, a vendor invoice).

b y

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Choose invoicing type

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-41

Document Flow in Invoicing

Date for invoicing reached

Invoicing chosen

Start invoicing Start invoicing

Check the FI-CA document

Billing documents

Credit memos/ backbillings

Check bill printout document

Invoicing documents implausible

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Invoicing simulation chosen Start invoicing simulation

Check simulation documents Simulate bill printout

Print documents

o n l y

Start invoicing

Posting documents FI-CA

Budget billing plans

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Choose invoicing type

F o r

FI-CA documents

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Enter selection criteria

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-42

Date for invoicing reached

z The IS-U clearing concept defines the following in IS-U clearing processing: „

„

Automatic determination of the purpose of a payment amount when a payment transaction is entered.

Enter selection criteria

Choose invoicing type

Invoicing simulation chosen

Invoicing chosen

Start invoicing Start invoicing

Check the FI-CA document

Start invoicing simulation

Check bill printout document

Invoicing documents implausible

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Check simulation documents Simulate bill printout

Automatic allocation of posted open items to each other in account maintenance

z The selected items are cleared or partially cleared on the basis of these allocations.

F o r

z Clearing control is flexible and enables you to model your own clearing strategy in Customizing.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Clearing Overview

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-43

Bill Printout Procedure

Date for invoicing reached

Print document ready for output

Select print document

Choose output type

Start output

Invoicing chosen

Invoicing simulation chosen

Start invoicing

Start invoicing simulation

Check the FI-CA document

Invoicing documents implausible Outsort documents

Choose invoicing type

Check bill printout document

Check simulation documents

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Start bill printout

Simulate bill printout

SAP spool Output

Raw data interface

Dear Mad Dea am/Sir: Dear Mad r Mad In am/ refeSir: renc am/Sir: In refe ce...to youe to your letter of In referen ren 9/27 r lette 9/27ce ... to you r letter of r of 9/27...

o n l y

Print documents

F o r

Mail processing

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Bill date

Archive  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Enter selection criteria

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-44

o n l y

Mass reversal

or „

Invoicing simulation chosen

Start invoicing

Start invoicing simulation

Check bill printout document

Check simulation documents

Invoicing documents implausible

Invoicing documents correct

Invoicing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Simulate bill printout

Reverse invoicing

Single reversal

Bill reversal:

Full reversal:

Bill printout and FI-CA documents for bills or partial bills are reversed by selecting a reconciliation key or document number.

Transactions

Choose invoicing type

Invoicing chosen

Check the FI-CA document

Invoicing Reversal „

Enter selection criteria

ISIS-U

Full reversal

Bill reversal

In addition to the bill, billing documents are also reversed by selecting using a document number. Full reversal does not include reversal of partial billing documents.

Transactions

„

Reversal of FI-CA document

„

„

Reversal of bill printout document

„

Reversal of FI-CA document Reversal of bill printout document

„

Possible reasons: Š Incorrect layout Š Printing problems

„

Reversal of billing document

„

Possible reasons:

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Date for invoicing reached

F o r

Š Incorrect billing

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Invoicing Reversal

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-45

Procedure for Bill Reversal

Document outsorted Reverse invoice

Billing chosen

Simulation chosen

Start billing

Start simulation

Check billing documents

Document implausible Billing document

Reversed bill

Bill

o n l y

Jane Smith .... Electricity . . .. Gas . . . . . Water . . . . . . Bud. billings . Credit memo .

C S C

b y

Restart invoicing

Choose billing type

. 900 1.000 . 700 2.900 . 300

Jane Smith .... . 900 Electricity . . .. 1.000 Gas . . . . . . . . 700 Water . . . . . 2.900 Bud. billings . . 300 Credit memo. .

Check simulation documents

Reverse documents

Billing documents implausible

Billing documents correct

Billing documents incorrect

Outsort documents

Start invoicing

Reverse billing

Start invoicing simulation

New bill Jane Smith .... . 900 Electricity . . .. . 1.000 . . . . . Gas 700 Water . . . . . . . 2.500 Bud. billings . . 100 . Receivable .

i n t e r n a l

Reversal indicator set  SAP AG 2003

b y

„ Accounting documents from Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA) and that were created by the IS-U invoice processing are reversed. Billing documents from contract billing (IS-UBI) and budget billing amounts from the budget billing plan component can be re-used for invoicing after bill reversal.

u s e

u s e

Correct data

Enter selection criteria

F o r

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Billing date reached

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-46

o n l y

C S C

b y

Reverse invoice

Reverse billing

Correct data

Restart billing

Restart invoicing

Document implausible Billing order

16.2.03 Incorrect billing document

23.2.03 Reversed billing document

24.2.03 Corrected billing document

Jane Smith

Jane Smith

Jane Smith

Electricity . . Bil . . l . . 900 Gas . . . . . . 1.000 Jane Smith Water . . . . . . 700 ....

Electricity . . Re . . ver 900sed bill Gas . . . . . 1.000Smith Jane Water . . . . - .... 700

Electricity . . Ne . .w . .bil 600 l Gas . . . . . . 1.000 e Smith Jan Water . . . . . . 700 ....

. . 900 Total . . . . . 2.600 Electricity . . .. 1.000 Gas . . . . . . .700 Water . . . . . . 00 .2.9 . gs lin bil Bud. . . 300 Credit memo .

. 900 Total . . . . - 2.600 Electricity . . . . 1.000 Gas . . . . . . . . 700 Water . . . . 2.900 Bud. billings . . . . 300 Credit memo .

900 Total . . . . . 2.300 Electricity . . . . .1.000 Gas . . . . . . . . 700 . . . Water 00 Bud. billings . 2.5 . 100 Total . . . . . .

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Document outsorted

F o r

„ This function is a mixture of the bill reversal and billing reversal functions. It enables you to reverse different types of documents in one step.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Procedure for Full Reversal

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-47

Invoicing: Unit Summary

z The invoicing procedure includes: Invoicing and printing of the bill

„

Requests for budget billings or creation of partial bills

„

Different reversal procedures

„

Flexible clearing control

o n l y

z Budget billing procedure „

Budget billing: statistical posting or debit entry

„

Payment plan: fixed amounts or variable amounts

F o r

C S C

z Output „

Printout on R/3 printer using spool

„

Raw data interface for external mail processing

„

Archiving

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-48

Exercises Unit: Billing and Invoicing Topic: Billing a Business Partner At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Describe the billing process and tasks. • Use the billing and simulation functions. Various business processes require the billing of an individual customer. This may be necessary due to the move-out of a customer, by the express wish of a customer or to advise a customer, for example.

o n l y

C S C

b y

1-1-1

Call up the move-out process. How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

C S C

Enter the last day of the previous month as the move-out date and choose the call. How would you proceed?

b y

i n t e r n a l

Create move-out: Initial screen

F o r

1-1-2

u s e

u s e

Business partner TB100120## with contract account TB100120## comes in to the customer center to report his/her move-out. You process the move-out and create the final billing. Check the move-out date and the bill sum total in the customer overview.

___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________

o n l y

___________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

i n t e r n a l

1-1

F o r

Carrying out a simulation for any billing period, or for an actual billing period, allows you to provide specific information, without altering data.

9-49

1-1-3

Execute move-out processing: Enter meter readings • Meter reading by customer. • Enter a plausible meter reading for each device and each register. How do you proceed? ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ What values would you enter? Electricity register 1 ___________________________________________________ Gas register 1 ___________________________________________________

o n l y

___________________________________________________

C S C

b y

___________________________________________________

i n t e r n a l

• Trigger final billing. Use printer LT0Q. How would you proceed? ___________________________________________________

u s e

• How would you proceed? ___________________________________________________

u s e

___________________________________________________ 1-1-4

Check the move-out in the customer overview.

b y

• What was the bill sum total?

C S C

___________________________________________________ • Display the bill.

o n l y

___________________________________________________

F o r

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Water register 1

• Where can you read the move-out date? On which date did the move-out take place? ___________________________________________________ • End the contact.

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-50

Business partner TB100110## comes to the customer center and asks for an interim billing. From the CIC, enter the meter readings supplied by the customer. Display the individual simulation of the bill. First, check the meter reading results and then request the actual billing. 1-2-1

How would you proceed? ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ Which meter readings have you entered? ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ Carry out the individual simulation and display the bill for business partner TB100110##. •

For the bill simulation, go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose Utilities Industry Æ Billing Æ Billing Execution Æ Individual Processing Æ Individual Simulation Æ Billing.

•

The most useful means of selection is via the contract account.

•

Choose the Display bill level of processing.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

1-2-2

How would you proceed?

b y

___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ Process and display the individual bill for business partner TB100110##. •

For the individual bill, go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose Utilities Industry Æ Billing Æ Billing Execution Æ Individual Processing Æ Individual Bill.

•

The most useful means of selection is via the contract account.

•

Choose the Bill level of processing.

How would you proceed? ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-51

o n l y

F o r

C S C

___________________________________________________ 1-2-3

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Enter the meter readings for business partner TB100110## using the CIC.

F o r

o n l y

1-2

1-3

Display the billing document for the water contract of business partner TB100110## and answer the following questions. 1-3-1

Display the billing document. How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

1-3-2

What was the scheduled billing period? ______________________________________________________

1-3-3

How many line items does the billing document contain? ______________________________________________________

1-3-4

Which line categories are available and what do they mean? Line category

Meaning

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

1-3-5

What was the total billing quantity determined?

1-4-1

Billing is only carried out after meter reading and before invoicing. ______________________________________________________

1-4-2

Billing simulation must be carried out before billing. ______________________________________________________

1-4-3

C S C

i n t e r n a l

True or false?

b y

After billing, the billable orders are produced. _____________________________________________________

1-4-4

o n l y

F o r

1-4

u s e

u s e

b y

______________________________________________________

The billing documents are processed further during invoicing. _____________________________________________________

1-4-5

Individual billing items can be entered manually as backbilling or as a credit memo. _____________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-52

Exercises Unit: Billing and Invoicing Topic: Invoicing a business partner At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Describe the invoicing process and tasks. • Use the invoicing and simulation functions. • Explain the budget billing procedure. • Provide information on the budget billing plan.

C S C

Simulate invoicing documents for business partner TB100110##. Carry out the following steps: 2-1-1

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-1-2

b y

Check the log How would you proceed?

C S C

i n t e r n a l

u s e

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-1-3

o n l y

F o r

Invoicing simulation How would you proceed?

u s e

b y

2-1

Display the print document. How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-1-4

Simulate the bill. How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

i n t e r n a l

After calculating the budget billing plan for the next period, the bill can be printed with details of the bill due date and the new budget billing amount due date.

F o r

o n l y

The billing results are compared with the transactions in open item accounting. The bill sum total is determined in this way.

9-53

o n l y

Process the actual invoice for business partner TB100110##. 2-2-1

How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-2-2

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-2-3

How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-3

Provide information on the print document. 2-3-1

From the customer overview, display the print document for business partner TB100110##. How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________

b y

u s e

Display the bill in customer overview

______________________________________________________ 2-3-2

How many line items does the print document contain? How would you proceed?

u s e

______________________________________________________

b y

______________________________________________________ 2-3-3

What is the bill sum total?

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Check the log

i n t e r n a l

How would you proceed? ______________________________________________________

o n l y

F o r

Invoice the business partner

F o r

C S C

2-2

______________________________________________________ 2-3-4

Which rate was used in the calculation? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-3-5

Enter the bill due date. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-54

True or false? 2-4-1

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-4-2

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-4-3

The invoice takes into account billing documents from other company codes. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-4-4

The bill due date is always derived from the posting date and the terms of payment. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-4-5

C S C

b y

Only one invoice is ever generated for all contracts of the contract account.

The invoice generates the print documents.

i n t e r n a l

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 2-4-6

The bill can be reversed separately or reversed along with billing. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-4-7

u s e

The billing document only takes into account statistically posted documents

b y

______________________________________________________

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Invoicing is only carried out after billing.

F o r

o n l y

2-4

______________________________________________________

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-55

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

9-56

IUT110

© SAP AG

Unit: Billing and Invoicing Topic: Billing a business partner

1-1

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Choose Utilities industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center. Identify the business partner by entering the number TB100120## in the Business partner field and choose Enter twice. The business partner is stored on the clipboard.

Choose the MR data tab and enter plausible meter readings. Check the Meter reading status column (RS). This must contain the value 1. If the value is different, you have entered an implausible meter reading result and you can use the Correct button to enter a plausible result. Choose the Final bill button. You must enter a reconciliation key. Enter IUT110-01 and save the data. Confirm the data for printing. Save the move-out.

1-1-4

You return to the CIC. Refresh your data in the navigation area. Go to Info and choose Customer overview. Double click on the current bill to display it. Now choose the Simulate bill pushbutton. Check that the tabs for the contracts have been deactivated. In the MvOut date field, you can see the date on which the customer moved out. Double-click on the invoice sum total to display the print document. Choose the End contact button.

i n t e r n a l

u s e

b y

C S C

1-1-3

C S C

Enter the move-out date. You are now in the move-out processing screen.

b y

1-1-2

u s e

Choose the Move-out partner call that is found under the Move I/O call group.

i n t e r n a l

1-1-1

F o r

o n l y

Solutions

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-57

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Choose Utilities industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center. Identify the customer. 1-2-1

Choose the action Enter customer meter reading. Enter the meter reading results for each contract individually and save the entries (you will have to carry out this process three times).

1-2-2

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Utilities industry → Billing → Billing Execution → Individual Processing → Individual Simulation → Billing

1-2-3

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Utilities Industry → Billing → Billing Execution → Individual Processing → Individual Bill

C S C

b y

1-3-2

The header data of the billing document provides the most important data for billing.

1-3-3

The Document overview tab provides an overview of the billing lines.

1-3-4

ZWATER

Energy price

000004

Rental price

IQUANT

Quantities (meter readings)

C S C

1-3-5

b y

The billing quantity is visible in the table overview or in the individual documents.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Choose F4 for help in the Document no. field. Enter your business partner number. You will receive a list of all the billing documents of the customer to choose from.

u s e

1-3-1

i n t e r n a l

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Utilities Industry → Billing → Billing Execution → Display Document

u s e

1-3

F o r

o n l y

1-2

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-58

1-4 1-4-1

True, since billing processes the meter reading results and provides prices of valuated quantities for invoicing.

1-4-2

False. The billing simulation is only a demonstration of how the real billing would be carried out. The billing simulation produces simulation documents that can be used only for invoice simulation purposes.

1-4-3

False. The billing order results from the creation of the meter reading order. “Billable” status is granted when a billing-relevant meter reading becomes available. Invoice orders are the result of billing.

1-4-4

True. Contrary to the billing documents, the billing simulation documents can only be processed further by invoicing simulation.

1-4-5

True.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-59

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

9-60

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Billing and Invoicing Topic: Invoicing a business partner

2-1

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Utilities Industry → Invoicing → Execute Invoicing → Individual Processing → Create Bill 2-1-2

Begin the simulation with all the billing documents.

2-1-3

Once the simulation is complete, select ‘Display Document’. You can also call up the print document using the following menu path:

o n l y

Select the Document Simulated dialog box.

Utilities industry → Invoicing → Execute Invoicing → Display Print Document

C S C

b y

u s e

Choose the Simulate bill button.

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: Utilities Industry → Invoicing → Execute Invoicing → Individual Processing → Create Bill Identify the business partner. Enter a reconciliation key.

2-2-2

Once the invoicing has been completed successfully, you can display the log.

2-2-3

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:

b y

2-2-1

u s e

Choose Utilities industry → Customer Service → Front Office/Customer Interaction Center → Customer Interaction Center.

F o r

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-61

o n l y

Identify the business partner by entering their number in the Business partner field. Choose Customer overview from the Information call group. Do not leave this display.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

2-2

i n t e r n a l

2-1-4

F o r

2-1-1

2-3-1

Double click on the total amount of the bill. You will automatically branch to the print document display.

2-3-2

The number of document line items is displayed under Document overview.

2-3-3

Go to Header data and view the bill amount.

2-3-4

Choose Document overview. In the Rate field, you can read the various rates used in the calculation. Choose Doc. lines. If necessary, leaf through the various line items with different line categories using F6 or F7 or

2-3-5

Choose Header data. The Net due date field contains the bill due date.

F o r

2-4-2

False. A contract account can be specified for each account, regardless of whether they are to be billed together with other contracts or separately.

2-4-3

True.

2-4-4

False. The posting date, document date or system date may be used as the baseline date for calculating when the bill falls due.

2-4-5

True.

2-4-6

True.

2-4-7

False. Depending on the budget billing procedure, the bill sum total is determined by calculating the statistically posted budget billings or including the outstanding partial bills.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

True. Invoicing processes the meter reading results and the open item accounting data and, using this information, generates the bill and the new budget billing plan.

i n t e r n a l

2-4-1

C S C

2-4

b y

o n l y

2-3

© SAP AG

IUT110

9-62

Energy Data Management

Contents: z Overview z Profile Header z Profile Allocation for Register z Point of delivery z Profile Values

F o r

o n l y

z Formula Profiles z Synthetic Profiles

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-1

Energy Data Management: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe functions and content of EDM z Describe the components that make up profiles z Explain the connection of profiles to the master data

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-2

Energy Data Management: Business Scenario

z Values determined by automated meter reading for an interval meter should be copied to the system

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-3

What is Energy Data Management? Profile Management

Billing Spot Spot price price

EDM • Historical profile

Additional Additional agreement: agreement: Spot Spot delivery delivery John Smith 10 Park Avenue 24

KW

12345 NY

60

• Price profile

30

• Forecast profile

10

Billing period May 1st – 01.06. Consumption Price Charge $0.10 $40.00

Spot kWh

100 kWh

$0.50 $50.00

o n l y

C S C

$115.00

i n t e r n a l

b y

$0.25 $25.00

400 kWh

F o r

Settlement  SAP AG 2003

b y

„ Energy Data Management (EDM) enables you to manage consumption data and corresponding business processes. EDM is particularly useful for managing and billing consumption data that is measured at specific intervals (for example load profiles and load shapes).

u s e

u s e

100 kWh

Off-Peak kWh

Amount Due

Agreed Agreed price price

„ EDM enables you to bill interval data such as RTP rates (real-time pricing) and time-of-use rates.

C S C

„ Settlement

o n l y

• deals with settlement processes, amounts and charges, as well as procurement schedules and network profiles.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

On-Peak kWh

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-4

Energy Data Management 1

a Dat y entr

Tradit. meter

Da ta try

EXPORT

IMPORT

Prelim. Billing

meter reading document customer meter reading

Printout

MR MR data data mgmt mgmt

Contract Contract A/R A/R ++ A/P A/P

MD E

Do wn loa d Up loa d

Invoicing Invoicing

Billing Billing

Scheduling Scheduling

Other modules

Data entry

EDIFACT

F o r

o n l y

en

Point Point of of delivery delivery

Real-time pricing

EDM

S

Do wn loa Si d gn al

Interval meter

na ig

Derived

Do

load profiles

Load Load profile profile mgmt mgmt

Auto.MR MR Auto. Auto. MR systems d systems a systems lo l wn

Device Device Management Management

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Public network

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-5

Energy Data Management 2 z Variant-based billing (IS-U/CCS) Differentiation of various rate periods using registers

„

Consumption billing for each register (per rate period) using any complex billing rules

„

Construction of cost estimates from basic formulas

„

High billing throughput

„

Differentiation between fixed intervals of measurement (such as 15 min, 30 min, 1hr)

„

Measurement using interval meters

„

Consumption billing for each interval in accordance with interval-specific conditions

„

Billing complies with the typical table calculation procedure

„

Low billing throughput

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

z Profile-based billing (IS-U/EDM)

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-6

z Profile Type Historical profile, schedule profile, formula profile, forecast profile, synthetic profile, day profile z Consistency check group determines the checks that are executed when profile values are imported z Replacement Value Group determines the calculation of plausible values that are used instead of missing or implausible actual values z Validity Period z Profile value category Amount, factor, quantity, demand, price, other

F o r

i n t e r n a l

z Interval length 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 ,minutes

„ Characteristics are determined in the header data of a profile. „ Once the profile header has been saved, only the description, consistency checks and the replacement value procedure group can be changed.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Profile Header

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-7

Profile Allocation for Register

Business Business partner partner

Contract Contract

o n l y

Premise Premise

z The role determines the profile's task for this register z Examples of roles are measurement and forecast

i n t e r n a l

Register Register

Connection Connection object object

F o r

C S C

Installation Installation

z Profiles can be allocated to (logical) registers of interval meters z This allocation is historical and role-based

Contract Contract account account

Device Device

Measured Measured Profile Profile

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Regional Regional structure structure

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-8

Point of delivery

Business Business partner partner

Contract Contract account account

Contract Contract

z The point of delivery is used to exchange meter reading results Measured Measured Profile Profile

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Register Register

z The point of delivery is used for communication in automatic data exchange

i n t e r n a l

Device Device

z A point of delivery has one external identification number at any time (point of delivery description according to metering code, for example)

F o r

o n l y

Installation Installation

C S C

Point Point of of delivery delivery

z Point to which a utility service is supplied or to which a utility service can be determined for a customer

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-9

For example: Siemens metering Interval meter

Download Signal

AMR system

Conversion

Profile

Point of delivery

Other market participants

EDI subsystem

C S C

For example: MSCONS

i n t e r n a l

EDI

Meter reading results

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

IS-U/EDM

Interface

o n l y

Importing Profile Values

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-10

Profile Values z A profile value is saved for every interval z At least one status is saved for every profile value z Multiple versions can be managed for every profile z Profile values can be displayed in table or in graphical form z Profile values can be changed individually or for certain periods of time z Profile values can be imported using BAPI or IDoc z An OLE (Excel) interface exists

o n l y

F o r

z Profile values can be displayed on the web

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-11

1/4h demand(kW)

Formula Profile

100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20

17.01.1995

12:00

00:00

12:00

12:00

00:00

00:00

20.01.1995

21.01.1995

RP

LT total load UI

NL net losses

+ +

request request

SL street lights

request

o n l y

UI

rest load RL = LT - NL - SL - MC request

+ UI

scheduling

+ +

MC measured customers

UI

+

C S C

b y

19.01.1995

i n t e r n a l

elementary load profile automatic

aggregated load profile

UI

formula based profile

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

18.01.1995

EDM

F o r

„ Formula profiles are used to calculate profile values on the basis of a functional connection. „ You should use formula profiles if the relationship of input parameters to output parameters rarely changes (for the grid energy-feeding curve, for example)

C S C

„ Formula profiles allow automatic calculation depending on the input parameters

b y

„ The calculation is scalable „ User-defined formulas can be supplemented

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

12:00

00:00

0

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-12

Synthetic Profiles Residential customer

Summer

Workday Weekend

Winter

Workday

Weekend Winter

24:00

00:00

24:00

00:00

24:00

00:00

24:00

Summer

Workday

Weekend

00:00

Workday

Weekend

Workday

b y

u s e

Tu 30.03

We 31.03

Th 01.04

Fr 02.04

Sa 03.04

Su 04.04

Mo 05.04

Tu 06.04

u s e

„ Synthetic profiles are used where an interval measurement does not take place. „ Profile containing values that are generated on the basis of predefined periods (defined by day and season blocks) and the corresponding day or annual profiles

C S C

„ Synthetic profiles are used for classifying customers or customer groups

b y

„ Synthetic profiles are allocated at installation level.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Mo 29.03

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Su 28.03

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-13

Energy Data Management: Summary

You are now able to: z Describe the components that make up profiles z Explain the connection of profiles to the master data

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-14

Exercises Unit: Energy Data Management Topic: Profile management At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Display profiles • Determine and interpret profiles Provide yourself with an overview of the EDM component.

Display the profile header allocated to business partner TR0101a0xx (xx = group number). 1-1-1

b y

____________________________________________________________

u s e

1-1-2

What profile type was allocated? ____________________________________________________________

1-2

What role has been allocated to the profile of business partner TR0101a0xx. 1-2-1

b y

What device is the profile allocated to?

C S C

i n t e r n a l

What is the profile header’s status?

u s e

____________________________________________________________ 1-3

Display the profile values. What is the highest profile value? Enter the following as selection criteria: 01.10.yyyy – 31.10.yyyy (yyyy = this year). Display the profile graphically.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

1-1

_________________________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

10-15

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

10-16

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Energy Data Management Topic: Profile management

1-1

Display the profile header allocated to business partner TR0101a0xx (xx = group number). Select: Utilities Industry Æ Energy Data Management Æ Profile Management Æ Profile Header Æ Display Enter the business partner and choose Continue. Double click on the profile. The profile header is displayed in the right-hand side of the screen.

In the status field, select the symbol 1-1-2

C S C

The historical profile type has been allocated to the profile. 1-2

What role has been allocated to the profile of business partner TR0101a0xx. Select: Utilities Industry Æ Energy Data Management Æ Profile Management Æ Display Profile Allocation.

u s e

b y

What profile type was allocated?

Enter the business partner and choose Continue. Double click on the profile. You can view the allocated role in the right-hand side of the screen.

b y

1-2-1

What device is the profile allocated to?

C S C

The profile allocation is displayed in the right side of the screen area. 1-3

o n l y

Display the profile values. What is the highest profile value? Enter the following as selection criteria: 01.10.yyyy – 31.10.yyyy (yyyy = this year). Display the profile graphically. Select: Utilities Industry Æ Energy Data Management Æ Profile Management Æ Display Profile Values. Enter the business partner and the selection date. Select the profile. The profile values appear in the right-hand area of the screen. In the upper screen area, select the column containing the profile values and execute the sorting function

.

Display the values graphically by selecting the graphic symbol.

© SAP AG

IUT110

u s e

i n t e r n a l

and display the status.

i n t e r n a l

F o r

What is the profile header’s status?

F o r

o n l y

1-1-1

10-17

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

10-18

IUT110

© SAP AG

Real-Time-Pricing

Contents: z Overview z RTP interface z Components of the RTP interface

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-1

Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the Real-Time-Pricing interface and its components z Explain the connection of the RTP interface to IS-U billing

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-2

Real-Time-Pricing:Business Scenario

z Values determined by automated meter reading for an interval meter should be billed in the system

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-3

RTP Overview

Customer/ Contract

IS-U/CCS

data

Download

Signal

AMR System

Device management

Interval meter

EDM

Point of delivery (EDIS indicator)

Load shape

RTP interface

Contract accounts receivable & payable

o n l y

System EDI / XML

Billing

b y

Other modules

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Scheduling

i n t e r n a l

C S C

MSCONS

F o r

„ The RTP interface is a data object that connects the components energy data management (IS-UEDM) and contract billing (IS-U-BI).

b y

„ You can use the RTP interface to prepare profiles in IS-U-EDM for billing. „ Use profiles directly for IS-U billing. To do this, you have to allocate the RTP interface to the rate you want to use to bill an interval meter.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Invoicing

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-4

RTP interface

z Allows time series, such as load shapes, to be billed z Takes the load shape data directly from IS-U-EDM z Is fully integrated with IS-U-Billing z Allows flexible modeling of special customer and major customer billing using interval measurement z Is easily extendable (customer-specific formulas and result functions)

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-5

z Period-related billing „

Time-of-day blocks (on/off-peak rates)

„

Day blocks (week day/weekend day)

„

Season blocks (summer/winter)

z Use of a spot price or an index price z Determination of demand values (highest demand, for example) z Inclusion of other profiles for billing

F o r

z Determination of consumption blocks

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

RTP-Billing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-6

Example

E01 load shape: quantity

A03 over limit 2: quantity E03 limit 2: quantity A02 over limit 1: quantity

A04 over limit 1: demand

F o r

o n l y

E02 limit 1: quantity

A01 up to limit 1: quantity

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-7

Individual Individual RTP RTP interface interface PI

Installation Installation

Rate Rate determination determination

Rates Rates

VarProg. VarProg.

Installation Installation structure structure Logical Logical register register

...

P2

P12

Rate Rate type type Billing Billing Schema Schema Rate 1

Profile

C S C

b y

P1

Step 1 Step 2

VarProg.

Operand values

Example: quantity x price 1000kWh, 0.25 UNI Comparison of two demands 400kW, 300kW

i n t e r n a l

Rate n Step 1  SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ The billing master data to be processed and its connections is shown above.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

RTP RTP interface interface

Rate Rate category category

F o r

o n l y

Data Model for Billing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-8

Application Example: RTP Interface z Billing a commercial and industrial customer with an interval reading z Determine billing-relevant data „

Consumption in on-peak rate

„

Consumption in off-peak rate

„

Max. demand

IS-U/CCS Billing

RTP interface

Cons. Cons. On-Pk On-Pk Cons. Cons. Off-Pk Off-Pk

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Max. Max. demand demand

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

F o r

o n l y

EDM Repository

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-9

Season type Day type Day time type Component Control: DD.MM.YY.HH.MM - DD.MM.YYYY HH.MM Components

Profile

Pr1 = x1

yn = f(x1,x2,...

xm)

y1 y2

Components

Result Fkt. e1

y1 -> e1;e2 y2 -> e3

Facts

sum>

e2 < sum>

quanti = e1;e2 = = e3 demand

e3 < peak >

EDM Profile Management

IS-U Billing

RTP interface

Legend

C S C

b y

Out

x: y: e: quanti:

Input parameters Output parameters Event parameters Consumption

pr: Profile f: Formula demand: demand

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ Components: Defines the structure of parameter allocations in an RTP interface. Example: You want to allocate parameters separately in the RTP interface according to on-peak and off-peak rate times. In order to do this, you define a day time block that divides the day into on-peak and off-peak times.

u s e

u s e

x1

Formula

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

In

Active/Inactive

F o r

o n l y

Interface

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-10

Input Parameters Components Summer Weekend On-peak Off-peak Workday On-peak Off-peak Winter Weekend On-peak

o n l y

Workday On-peak

x1

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ Input parameters are defined in the RTP interface. Profiles are allocated to the input parameters in the individual RTP components. The values from these profiles are used for executing formulas. Profiles can be allocated to input parameters according to the structure that has been defined in the RTP component.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Off-peak

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

F o r

Off-peak

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-11

Formula definition Input

Virtual Profile

x2 Limit

xn )

y2 Virtual Profile

y3

x3 Limit

Virtual

2

C S C

b y

yn = f(x1,x2, …

1

Profile

Function Module  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

y1

x1 Profile

i n t e r n a l

„ The formula is the basis of profile calculation on which the RTP calculations are based. „ The formula is allocated to an RTP interface.

b y

„ It contains a fixed number of input and output parameters depending on the formula.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Output

Formula

F o r

o n l y

Formula

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-12

Result Components

Weekend On-peak Off-peak Workday On-peak

e1

Off-peak Winter Weekend

e2

On-peak

o n l y

Off-peak

F o r

Workday On-peak

C S C

Off-peak

Result e1 e2 e3

Function sum average peak

Op. Cat. QUANT DEMAND DEMAND

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

y1

Summer

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-13

Transfer of Results to RTP Operand

y1

QUANT DEMAND DEMAND

IS-U IS-U billing billing schema: schema: Rate: ON_OFF_PEAK RegOperand

o n l y

C S C

b y

Op. Cat.

sum average peak

RTP-Interface

ON_OFF_PEAK

001

....

...

...

007

QUANTI01

ONPEAKCON

...

Pricing for ON Peak consumption

008

QUANTI01

OFFPEAKCON

...

Pricing for OFF Peak consumption

...

...

i n t e r n a l

y1 = Output parameter e1 = Event parameter  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

function

e1 e2 e3

F o r

„ Result parameters can be allocated to an output parameter. „ Result parameters describe the result of an RTP interface once it has been executed. The values of a result parameter are defined using the result function.

C S C

„ The discrete result parameter is used as an operand in the rate (by allocating it to an operand).

b y

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

result

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-14

Components of an RTP Interface z RTP formula z RTP components z Result parameters

RTP interface

ƒ

„without rate time“ Components

C S C

b y

On-PK Off-Pk Components

Result Result parameters parameters Cons. Cons. On-Pk On-Pk Cons. Cons. Off-Pk Off-Pk

Cons. On-Pk Cons. Off-Pk Max. demand

Max. Max. demand demand

 SAP AG 2003

„ RTP formula: You can use formulas to make calculations based on profiles. Profiles are the results of a formula calculation.

u s e

u s e

RTP RTP components components

i n t e r n a l

b y

„ RTP Components: Defines the structure of parameter allocations in the RTP interface. „ Result parameters: Are allocated to operand categories. The result parameters supply the operands in the RPT rate in IS-U Billing.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Formula Formula

F o r

o n l y

EDM Repository

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-15

Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Summary

z The Real-Time-Pricing interface is fully integrated with the IS-U billing procedure z It links energy data management (profile management) to the IS-U billing functionality z You can use the RTP interface to flexibly establish certain billing regulations (billing of interval meters with special price agreements, for example)

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

11-16

Budget Billing Amounts

Contents: z Budget billing procedure z Determination and requirements of budget billing

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-1

Budget Billing: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Explain the difference between a budget billing plan and a payment plan z Create and change budget billing plans

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-2

Budget Billing: Business Scenario

z A customer's consumption pattern has changed. z After adjusting the period consumption, you recalculate the budget billing plan.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-3

Budget billing procedure

Payment plan

Budget billing A down payment, which is determined from the bill sum total and is recalculated for the next period.

ISIS-U

Budget billing categories Statistical posting with budget billing requirement

„

Debit-entry partial bill

Payment Plan Categories „ „

i n t e r n a l

fixed amounts Budget Billing Plan Variable amounts Average monthly plan

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

„

Monthly bills for an agreed amount (fixed or variable), and clearing at the end of the period

F o r

o n l y

Budget Billing Procedure: Overview

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-4

z Budget Billing Plan An average amount is determined manually or by simulation. The customer pays this amount for a specified period. At the end of this period, simulation occurs again for the next period. In addition, actual billing occurs monthly. The results of this billing are shown on the bill and cleared in the last month of the billing period.

z Average Monthly Billing Plan / Equalized Billing Plan In Average Monthly Billing/Equalized Billing, the customer is charged an average amount based on billings over the next 12 months (or less in the case of new customers). In addition, actual billing occurs monthly, and the results are shown on the bill. The amounts due for later months are calculated using the average of the previous months plus the current bill and the accumulated difference.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Payment Plan Categories

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-5

o n l y

Budget billing cycle Due date determination

Printout

Amount limits

Budget billing plan

Minimum charge

Amount rounding Manual Amount adjustment calculation Automatic factor determination

• • •

Grouping of budget billings from one billing period

• •

Display of the open budget billing amounts

Allocation of budget billings to individual contracts Display of the accumulated and individual budget billing amounts

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Clearing

F o r

Automatic and manual determination of the budget billing amount  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Budget Billing Plan: Overview

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-6

Creating / Adjusting Budget Billing Plans z Business processes „

For move-in

„

For periodic billing

Extrapolation

Due date

„

For invoicing

Budget billing plan

Grouping of contracts Amount check

z Amount determination „

Manual calculation

„

Automatic extrapolation

z Due date of budget billing amounts „

Terms of payment from the contract account

o n l y

F o r

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-7

i n t e r n a l

F o r

o n l y

„ Contracts that must be invoiced together are assigned a joint budget billing plan. All other contracts belonging to the contract account can have an individual budget billing plan.

C S C

„ Budget billing plans are normally created automatically (during invoicing or move-in, for example). However, they can also be created manually.

b y

„ Utility companies often only bill for their services at the end of a supply period (during annual consumption billing, for example) Therefore, to maintain liquidity during the current period, budget billings are billed by anticipating the total amount owed by the customer. The budget billing plan defines the dates and size of the budget billings and forms the basis for increases in budget billings.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Quantity-Based Extrapolation Actual Meter reading 2002 2002 01.11.

....

....

Billing period

....

....

01.08.

2003 2003 01.09.

....

....

....

....

....

....

01.14.

Budget Billing Period

o n l y

Extrapolation of consumption using configured weighting procedure; billing simulation for this period

C S C

b y

....

i n t e r n a l

Distribution Distribution of of total total simulated simulated amount amount over over the the budget budget billing billing due due dates dates  SAP AG 2003

C S C

„ For this reason, ensure you have generated schedule records for the next billing period before you simulate billing.

b y

„ Billing extrapolates consumption up to the next scheduled meter reading date. Billing is simulated for the budget billing period. In the billing document, the budget billing line items are transferred to invoicing. Invoicing adopts these amounts and distributes them over the individual budget billing due dates.

u s e

u s e

....

F o r

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Next Scheduled Meter Reading Date from Scheduling

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-8

o n l y

C S C

b y

Due date determination using terms of payment

„

Scheduling using the portion

Creation of partial bills

Generation of statistical posting documents that are calculated as down payments towards the bill sum total owed.

FI-CA posting

ISIS-U

Statistical posting

Generation of debit-entry partial bills that are calculated as down payments against the bill sum total owed. Debit entry

FI-CA posting

„

Statistical posting document

„

Actual debit-entry

„

Items per contract Repetition items for each budget billing amount due date.

„

Items per contract Documents only in customer account when receivable

„

„

„ „

Sales tax posting on payments

Sales tax posting on receivables

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Budget billing request

„

i n t e r n a l

„ The scheduled budget billing dates are determined from the portion valid for the contract and the parameter record. The following details are defined:

b y

• Length of the budget billing period (several months or one year) • Budget billing cycle, meaning that the scheduled dates are at regular intervals over the period (monthly or every few months).

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Process budget billing amounts

F o r

„ The specifications for the portion can be overridden in the budget billing plan or in the contract. Whilst changes in the budget billing plan take effect immediately, entries in the contract only become effective the next time a budget billing plan is produced. „ The budget billling due date results from the budget billling dates and the terms of payment in the contract account. „ When requesting budget billings, a debit entry can be generated in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable or a statistical posting (budget billings that do not affect the general ledger) can be carried out.

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-9

o n l y

F o r

Budget Billing Amounts Due

Budget Billings: Summary

You are now able to: z Explain the difference between a budget billing plan and a payment plan z Create and change budget billing plans

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

12-10

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Contents: z Overview z Documents Structure

„

Use

z Posting documents z Account display

o n l y

z Payments

F o r

z Returns

i n t e r n a l

C S C

z Dunning z Deferral and installment plan  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-1

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: z Describe the document structure in contract accounts receivable and payable z Provide information on customer accounts z Explain some common business transactions in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable and perform them in the system.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-2

o n l y

C S C

b y

CO

IS-U Invoicing

FI-GL FI-CA SD Invoicing

Ext. Billing Systems

Customer Relationship Management mySAP Financials

TR-CM

Dispute Mgmnt. Biller Biller Consolidator Direct

Treasury Credit Risk Mgmnt Mgmnt. In-House

COEC IM FI RE TM

Cash

FSCM

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

CO-PA

i n t e r n a l

„ SD billing documents can be directly transferred to the FI-CA subledger accounting or, under certain circumstances, posted as billing requests together with IS-U Invoicing. „ Bill documents from external systems can be imported to FI-CA using a standardized IDoc interface and processed there.

„ Additional account assignments in cost accounting are included and forwarded to the account assignment objects. IS-U invoicing supplies the component CO-PA with information about different ways of updating. This information is transferred in cycles by transfer reports that are triggered in FI-CA or IS-U. „ Integration into financial supply chain management improves customer-oriented processes. Business partners can use the Biller Direct component to check bills and initiate payments. The company can react to its customers using this information channel. „ Business information warehouse extractors have been developed for open and cleared FI-CA items as well as for other information relevant for customers „ Integrating FI-CA into CRM enables you to efficiently process customer transactions in the call center.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-3

o n l y

„ The subledger accounting postings are transferred in cycles to the general ledger (for example, once a day),

C S C

„ When they are posted to FI-CA contract accounts, they are immediately posted in cash management (TR-CM).

b y

i n t e r n a l

Business Information Warehouse

F o r

F o r

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Integration

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-4

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable and FI-CA

z Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable is the FI-CA component (Financial Accounting-Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable) z FI-CA is designed and executed as a subledger for customer processing

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-5

FI-CA Open Architecture

IS-U

IS-T

FI-CA Other

Open items Posting information

F o r

o n l y

IS-IS/CD

Data exchange

Information Business processes Workflows

„ IS-IS-CD: Industry Specific Component - Insurance: collections/disbursements „ IS-T: Industry Specific Component - Telecommunications

b y

„ Other industries: Public sector and media „ As of Release 4.64, the component FI-CAx has been delivered as an industry-independent solution of financial supply chain management.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-6

o n l y

„

Optimal use of storage space by means of a special document structure

„

Parallel processing of mass runs (such as payment run, dunning run).

„

Summarization of general ledger information (summary records)

Processing of business transactions convenient for clerks Documents are assigned to business partner accounts and contract accounts (and depending on the industry, they are also assigned to contracts) Standard processes (such as posting or paying) can be changed without making any modifications. Integration in the solutions mySAP Customer Relationship Management (CRM) and mySAP Business Information Warehouse (BW)

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Suitable for a large number of contract accounts and documents

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Special Features of FI-CA

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-7

Central Objects in FI-CA z Business partner Contains central data, such as names, addresses, communication data and bank details.

„

Represents a natural or legal person with whom business relationships can be conducted.

o n l y

z Contract account „

Contains control data, such as payment methods, terms of payment and dunning procedures.

„

Object, for which open item accounting is managed in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

„

Usually represents a group of contracts (industry-specific).

C S C

z Documents and items

FI-CA

BP Account

Account

Contract Contract

i n t e r n a l

z Contract (industry-specific)

F o r

Contract

IS-U  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-8

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Business Transactions

o n l y

Several OPs

Interest

Charges

New due item

OP (due)

Installm.plan

- Item (cleared)

Time

Doubtful entry Ind. val. adj. Write Off

Interest calc. Dunning

Duty collection

Archiving

C S C

Deferral

i n t e r n a l

Returns  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

-

F o r

Original OP / Charges

OP (not due)

Original OP

Invoicing

Account display

General ledger

Payment (cash payer, direct debit payer)

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-9

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Documents

z

Overview

z Documents z

Display account balance

z

Payments

z

Returns

z

Dunning

z

Installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-10

Documents: Aims

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: z Explain the document structure in contract accounts receivable and payable z Post receivables items

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-11

Documents: Introduction

z If business processes are not integrated with IS-U or SD, or automatically connected to Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable by an interface, individual postings can be inserted into the system as manual documents.

SAP Utilities

z Examples include rent receivables, lease receivables as well as receivables for an energy consultant.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-12

Documents: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-13

Document header 1:N

1:N

G/L G/L G/Litems G/Litems items items

Business partner Business partner Business items partner items Business partner items items

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

• G/L account item (revenue lines) This contains the data for the profit and loss statement, data for sales tax, as well as any additional account assignments for cost accounting

• Business partner items (receivables lines or reconciliation lines) These contain all data relevant for payment transactions or dunning and the receivables account or reconciliation account which is debited or credited.

IUT110

o n l y

© SAP AG

C S C

• Document header This contains the data that is valid for all line items, such as document date, posting date, reconciliation key.

b y

i n t e r n a l

„ The basis for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable is the document with

F o r

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Documents in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

13-14

General • Document date • Document type • Document number

Reference and currency • Reference • Currency • Conversion rules

Additional data

• Posting date • Reconciliation key • Single document

Management data

Document header

• Created by • Date entered • Origin

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

• Reversal document • Reversed with • Returns reason

General ledger

F o r

o n l y

Document Header Data

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-15

Header Data: General Document Data

General • Document date • Document type • Document number

i n t e r n a l

„ Document types • Distinguish between business transactions

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ The document date indicates the issue date of the original document.

b y

• Control document storage using the number range allocated. The document number is determined during posting by the number range. • Are valid for a single client

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Document header

• Examples of document types are: AB Miscellaneous document, GB Fees, FA Invoicing. „ Document number: • Key, which identifies the document in the contract account receivable and payable for each client. • Depending on the type of number assignment, the document number is assigned automatically by the system when the document is posted, or is preset externally when the document is entered. • The type of number assignment is decided by the document type entered in the document header. It specifies: - A number range from which the document number is chosen. - Whether the number is entered automatically or manually.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-16

Document Header: Reference and Currency

General • Document date • Document type • Document number

Reference and currency • Reference • Currency • Conversion rules

i n t e r n a l

„ The transaction currency is the key of the currency, in which the document was posted.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-17

o n l y

„ Exchange rate Exchange rate used for the conversion between the transaction currency and the local currency. The exchange rate is saved at the item level.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ The reference document number can contain the business partner document number or the number of the causal print document from IS-U Invoicing and can be used as search criteria. In correspondence, the reference document number is sometimes printed in place of the document number.

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Document header

Document Header: Link to General Ledger Accounting

General • Document date • Document type • Document number

Reference and currency • Reference • Currency • Conversion rules

General ledger

F o r

o n l y

Document header

„ Document items belonging to one summary record are summarized. If you do not want a summary, you can select single document or single item in the corresponding field for each document. This document is saved in the G/L document as a single document item.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-18

o n l y

„ Reconciliation key for G/L accounting: Key, in which the summary records of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable were written for transfer to downstream accounting. The key is entered as an external reference in the document header field "reference key" of the G/L account documents the summary records are transferred to the general ledger. This means that itemization of the totals posted in the general ledger is possible. You must assign the key for manual postings. For mass processing, the key is assigned by the program that executes processing (such as a payment run).

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Posting date: The date on which the document was posted in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable. The posting date may be different to the entry date (date of entry in the system) and the document date (date on which the original document was created).

b y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

• Posting date • Reconciliation key • Single document

Data on Business Partner Item

Business partner Contract account Contract Company code Process

Amounts

b y

C S C

o n l y

Payment data

Business partner items Mandatory data entries

Repetition specifications

Cash management and forecast data

Additional data -Item text -Grouping -Period key Alternative partner for payments

Optional data entries

 SAP AG 2003

„ Repetition specifications save memory space required for repetitive document items that only differ according to when they are due, for example, installment plan or budget billing plan items. The repetition items appear as 'normal' in the account balance display. „ Not every document needs a business partner. One example of this is a normal payment that leads to clearing of the affected receivables lines. In this case, only a document header and general ledger item is written for the payment, since the data relevant for the account assignment comes from the receivables lines that linked the payment.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-19

o n l y

„ The period key can be used, for example, if details about the billing period that the receivable relates to are to be included in the correspondence. The required key can be entered as an alternative to saving a long text for each item.

C S C

„ A grouping key can be assigned to any document items that should be depicted as one item in lists, correspondence and account processing (incoming payment).

b y

„ Item text can be used both internally and externally. To differentiate between these, texts for external use must begin with "*". This can then be specified on all correspondence, such as dunning notices and payment advice notes. The asterisks are automatically removed when the document is printed.

u s e

u s e

Set automatically

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Dunning data/ Interest calculation

Clearing data

F o r

F o r

Due dates: Net/Cash discount/deferral

Data on G/L Account Item

General ledger: company code, G/L account Amounts and tax code

Account assignment for subsequent accounting

o n l y

F o r

G/L items

„ In some cases FI-CA documents do not contain G/L items. These are statistical documents. Statistical posting simplifies the administration of doubtful receivables as these postings are not transferred to the general ledger, and are thus easier to reverse if they are not paid. Budget billing receivables are a typical example, as in most cases, there is no bill and the collection of payment, if payment is not made, is less likely than in cases where a bill exists. In the case of statistical budget billing amounts, the value added tax is also due with the first payment of the budget billing amount and, as a result, when the receivable is posted in the general ledger. Dunning charges are another example that are generally not paid.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-20

i n t e r n a l

F o r

o n l y

„ The tax transaction determines which type of tax is used. The keys are defined in the system and cannot be changed. The transaction key is for documenting the tax type after transfer into R/3 general ledger accounting. Automatic determination of tax accounts is performed using the transaction key.

C S C

„ A planning level is allocated in the document item of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable for updating in cash management. The planning level is valuated in the liquidity forecast.

b y

„ Value date: Day when values are set. The value date indicates the day on which the financial transaction actually took place in financial accounts (bank accounts, bank sub-accounts). The value date is the decisive date for displaying daily financial status and liquidity forecast in cash management.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Data Entry: Header Data and Default Values

General • Document date • Document type • Document number

Reference and currency • Reference • Currency • Conversion rules

o n l y

General ledger

General data

Entry control

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

„ The calculation of taxes means that the system automatically calculates taxes using the specifications in the business partner items during simulation or posting. If you do not set the indicator, you have to enter the tax lines separately. „ Default value for company code

• The user settings allow you to block cross-company code posting. If this setting has been made, users must enter a company code. „ The clearing reason is saved in the cleared line items and can be displayed during analysis of the single items (such as in the account balance display). If you clear items using the function Post document, you must specify a clearing reason here. You can define a default value in Customizing.

IUT110

13-21

o n l y

• Where no company code is entered, the default company code is added to each document line item. The company code is an entry aid for documents or line items that are to be posted in the same company code.

© SAP AG

b y

„ The entry variant controls which fields are to be hidden for posting, changing, and displaying a document. This allows you to customize screens for the business transaction (such as a down payment).

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

• Posting date • Reconciliation key • Single document

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

F o r

F o r

Document header

• Clearing reason • Entry variants • Company code • Screen variants • Calculate taxes • Jurisdiction code • Net receivables

Data Entry: Items z Receivables / credit memos Business partner BP1 Contract account CA 1 Amount $ 100 Business partner BP2 Contract account CA2 Amount $ 150

Business partner BP3 Contract account CA3 Amount $ 250

z Automatic determination of general ledger accounts and tax accounts using transactions z Classification using document type z Automatic determination of due dates using terms of payment in the contract account z Receivables or credit can be cleared immediately

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ Receivables and credit memos can also be cleared either immediately or partially. „ Receivables lines can be repeated with different due dates with specification of a start date at monthly or daily intervals (for example, for distributing a receivable amongst payment plans). „ The document items of a document do not have to belong to the same business partner. Posting to different business partner is possible.

IUT110

13-22

o n l y

F o r

C S C

„ Due dates are determined automatically using the terms of payment in the contract account.

© SAP AG

b y

„ Receivables and credit memos can be entered manually. During posting, a transaction that is defined in the system is specified for each business transaction. In this way, the general ledger accounts are automatically determined and put into the receivables and revenue lines. The same occurs for tax codes and tax accounts.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

o n l y

C S C

b y

z A transaction is a combination of main and sub-transactions z Texts for the transactions explain the business transaction and are available for correspondence z Transactions control FI-CA account determination z Transactions control FI-CA value added tax determination z FI-CA uses internal main and sub-transactions, which are assigned internally by various FI-CA business processes. The transactions also control these business processes.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Transactions explain the business transaction on which the posting of a line item is based.

F o r

„ Example in IS-U for • Main transaction: periodic billing

b y

• Sub-transaction: receivable from energy charge

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Transactions in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-23

Billing

Energy charge receivable Energy charge credit Clearing price receivable Clearing price credit Service charge receivable Service charge credit

Charges

Statistical dunning charge Dunning charge Charge for items in installment plan

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

Sub-transaction

i n t e r n a l

Main transaction

F o r

o n l y

Examples of Transactions

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-24

Transfer to General Ledger Accounting

FI-CA documents 1. Doc.:

Amount Net Tax 2. Doc.: Amount Net Tax Reconciliation key:

Document posting

o n l y

D C C

$ 696 $ 600 $ 96

Generate postings

Reconciliation key 98126ISU01

C S C

b y

140000 800000 175001

FI documents 40 140000 696,-50 800000 600,-50 175001 96,-Reference key 98126ISU01 Reference transaction FKKSU

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Summary Record

F o r

„ The reconciliation key is the key used to record totals records. „ The reference key is derived from the reconciliation key, stored in the the general ledger document header and can be used to trace the original subledger documents for general ledger documents.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

$ 580 $ 500 $ 80 $ 116 $ 100 $ 16 98126ISU01

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-25

Summary Record z Transfer unit for postings from Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable to financial accounting z Single documents from Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable are grouped into summary records if: „

Summarization was not prevented manually

„

They have the same reconciliation key

„

They can be grouped according to G/L accounting and subsequent application criteria.

o n l y

„

Debit/credit indicator

„

General ledger account

„

Currency

„

Criteria of subsequent systems or components (cost accounting)

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Company code and date

F o r

„

C S C

z Examples for summarization criteria are:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-26

Posting Documents: Summary (1)

z The most important data in the document header is: Document number

„

Reconciliation key

„

Posting date

„

Document date

o n l y

z The business partner item „

Is allocated to a business partner

„

Contains the amount to be posted

„

Contains the account assignment for G/L accounting determined by the transaction

C S C

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

z The G/L account item contains information on the corresponding G/L accounts and additional account assignments.

F o r

b y

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-27

Posting Documents: Summary (2)

z If necessary, documents can be posted manually in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable. z This is possible for both receivables and credit memos. z An item can be entered: „

Individually in detail

„

In a list

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-28

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Account Display

z

Overview

z

Documents

z Display account balance z

Payments

z

Returns

z

Dunning

z

Deferral and installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-29

Account Display: Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: z Analyze the development of a contract account z Provide information on the items of a contract account z Use the navigation options in the account balance display

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-30

Account Display: Introduction

z Utility companies often have to deal with large numbers of items due to the large number of customers and budget billing payments. z Information on contract accounts is given quickly and comprehensively. z In addition to this, there are different displays that can be configured individually. z Different display formats can be used depending on the tasks of the clerk (accounting, dunning, for example)

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

z Individual selection of display variants can be defined in the user parameters.

F o r

o n l y

SAP Utilities

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-31

Account Display: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-32

Account Display: Initial Screen z Selections: - Business partner, contract account, contract Company code, installment plan, collective bill, reference - List category for restricting the items to be displayed according to "status“. Examples: All open, due, or statistical items - User-specific selections z List representation defines the line structure z Sorting is possible

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-33

z The list category determines which items are selected for the account display (such as open items or down payment requests). z The list category enables you to preconfigure frequently used selections. z As an alternative to selecting items using list categories, you can select: „

A preset standard, for example, all open, non-statistical items

„

Define specific items in the detail selection

z Even if a list category is used, the selection can still be changed using "detail". This change is not saved, rather only used for the current display.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Account Display: List Category

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-34

Account Display: Line Layout z Determines which fields of a document are included in the account display. z Different line structure variants can be selected in the account display. It is also possible to totalize and find values using particular criteria. z The same output list can be viewed in a number of ways. z Depending on the cursor position, you can branch to the detailed view of the document items, master data and the posting basis

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-35

o n l y

C S C

Business Partner item list

G/L item list

Overview

Detail screen of business of business partner items

Detail screen of G/L items

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

b y

Header

F o r

u s e

„ It is possible to return to the header display from any screen.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Account Display: Navigating in the Document Display

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-36

o n l y

C S C

Payment data

Display Change Reverse Clearing back Installment plan Budget billing plan Histories ...

From payment run From payment lot From returns document From repayment request Payment use

Basic list Account

Master data

Mass change Account maintenance Installment plans Budget billing plans Dunning notices Creditworthiness Partner locks

Business partner - Change contract account - Change contract

i n t e r n a l

b y

Document

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ The agent can call up all debit processes with changing transactions.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Account Display: Navigation and Functions

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-37

Account Display: Summary (1)

z Variable item selection „

All items/open items/cleared items (with/without payments)

„

Statistical items (all/budget billing plan/charges/...)

„

User-specific selection criteria Example: By due dates, transaction

„

Line layout variants

„

User-defined account display

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z Variable display

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-38

Account Display: Summary (2)

z Immediate access to environment data „

Document

„

Business partner/contract account/contract

„

Payment use

„

Original receivable(s) for installment plan items

„

Dunning history

„

...

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z Sort and summary functions within the account display

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-39

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Payments

z

Overview

z

Documents

z

Display account balance

z Payments z

Returns

z

Dunning

z

Installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-40

Payment Run: Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: z Explain the processing steps of a payment lot z Post payments using a payment lot z Post payments at cash desk

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-41

Payment Run: Introduction

z Utility companies have to deal with large numbers of incoming payments in a reliable efficient manner. z Payment flow reaches the utility company in various ways. These include data medium exchange, automatically read documents and other documents. SAP Utilities

z Background and dialog processes are provided for processing payments, depending on the situation.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-42

Payment Run: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-43

Automatic and Manual Payments

z Automatic incoming payments

z Payment lot z Payment order lot

z Collection procedure

z Check lot

z Credit repayment z Returns

z Credit card lot Automatic

Manual

z Payment at cash desk z Returns lot

o n l y

F o r

„ Returns processing Automatic returns processing with workflow link is provided for returned payments from financial institutions and credit card companies, as well as for returned incoming checks.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-44

i n t e r n a l

F o r

o n l y

„ Credit repayment: Credit is automatically repaid via check or bank transfer, and the corresponding output media are created.

C S C

„ Collection procedure Payments are handled by collection or direct debit from financial institutes or credit card companies and the corresponding output media are created.

b y

„ Automatic incoming payment: Incoming payment data from previous systems, financial institutions, or agencies is processed in payment lots. The system automatically creates a payment posting for the corresponding business partner. Payments are automatically allocated to one or more receivables items. If an incoming payment cannot be allocated to an item, it is possible to post an account at contract account level. Manual post-processing in the clarification worklist is also possible.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Payment Lot z The payment lot stores data from external payments. z Payment data is stored in a lot if: „

It has the same source

„

It is to be processed together

z Data for a group of incoming checks is stored in a payment lot. This type of lot is accordingly called a check lot. z Bank transfers and/or debit memos that were received are extracted from an account statement and stored in a payment lot.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-45

Payment Lot: Structure I

Header entry

z Data is saved in the payment lot header if: „

It applies to the entire lot

„

It is used as a default value for items

o n l y

F o r

u s e

• Key

• Reconciliation key for general ledger accounting

b y

i n t e r n a l

„ Data that applies to the entire lot:

F o r

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

• Search term

C S C

• Posting date • Bank clearing account

o n l y

• Company code for the bank posting • Currency • Value date

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-46

Payment Lot: Structure II

Header Entry

z Data is saved in the payment lot header if: „

It applies to the entire lot

„

It is used as a default value for items

z An item is a payment with: Item 1 Item 2

„

Amount

„

Specifications for selection of receivables to be cleared

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-47

New payment lot

Create

Close

Post

Payment lot complete

Postprocessing

Change

z Payment lot processing includes the following steps: „

Create

„

Change (optional)

„

Close (deletion and insertion of items is no longer allowed)

„

Post

„

Post-processing (for clarification and errors) Post-processing is necessary if postings were generated in an interim account, or if it was not possible to make any postings.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

F o r

o n l y

Payment Lot: Processing Steps

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-48

o n l y

C S C

b y

Create

Close

Post

Payment lot complete

z A payment lot can be created: „

In dialog mode (for example a check lot)

„

By program (for example an incoming bank transfer lot)

z The following is specified: „

Bank clearing account

„

Reconciliation key

„

Header data for the payment lot

„

Specifications for payment documents, selection categories and line layout of individual items to be entered

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

New payment lot

F o r

„ Default values on the header screen: • The actual date is proposed.

• The document type, clearing reason, and the selection categories are stored in Customizing.

F o r

o n l y

• Select the bank clearing account to be posted.

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

• The last values entered (if available) are inserted automatically for the company code, currency, and business area.

b y

i n t e r n a l

Payment Lot: Create

13-49

New payment lot

Payment lot complete

z The essential entries are: „

Amount

„

Payment use via selection category and selection value for choosing open items, which are cleared by payment.

z Selection categories are one character abbreviations that are defined in Customizing. „

C S C

b y

Post

These include: G for business partner, K for contract account, V for contract

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Close

i n t e r n a l

„ Enter one line of data for each payment during list entry. Variants of the line structure can be recorded in Customizing. You can change the entry variants using the Screen variant key. „ The Details button branches to the detailed view of a selected item. You can enter additional data on the payment, if required.

b y

C S C

„ On the detail screen, you can enter any additional data necessary for payment allocation or for further clarification.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Create

F o r

o n l y

Payment Lot: Create Items

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-50

New payment lot

Create

Close

Post

Payment lot complete

Change

z Items can be deleted and added as long as the payment lot is not closed. z Data on items that have already been entered can also be corrected. z Interrupted entry of a payment lot can be resumed using this function.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Payment Lot: Change

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-51

Payment Lot: Close New payment lot

Create

Close

Post

Payment lot complete

z Closing a payment lot means that adding or deleting items is no longer possible. z Corrections can still be made on the payment lot items after closing. You can also re-open a lot z Posting cannot begin until a lot is closed.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-52

New payment lot

Create

Close

Post

Payment lot complete

z Postings can either be dealt with in dialog mode or in a background process (typical for mass data). z Postings to contract accounts including payment use with: „

Clearing of open items and/or

„

Generation of payments on account

z Posting to an interim account if the payment use is unclear

F o r

z A check deposit list can be printed for check lots

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

• The payment use can consist of different components:

• For other lots: One posting of bank clearing account to payment use or interim account. The document number is recorded in the associated items in the payment lot.

o n l y

- Clearing/partial clearing of open items - Postings on account - Expense/revenue (payment difference) - Generation of receivables (charges, interest).

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

• For a check lot: One summary posting for each lot: incoming checks account to clearing account, and one posting for clearing account to payment use for each check (optional). The document number of the check deposit posting is noted in the payment lot header.

b y

i n t e r n a l

„ The following postings are generated in a posting run:

F o r

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Payment Lot: Post

13-53

z Determination of the amount available for clearing z Determination of the selection criteria for open items z Open item selection z Conversion of item currency to clearing currency z Distribution of clearing amount to open items (clearing control) z Generation of document items (such as cash discounts, charges, down payments) caused by clearing z Posting of the payment document and noting the clearing information in the cleared items

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Automatic Clearing: Process

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-54

o n l y

Create

Close

Post

Payment lot complete

Postprocessing

If automatic allocation was not possible: z Clarification of payment use and transfer from interim account to a contract account in post processing z Correction of payment items (such as selection specifications) and restart of postings for selected items z Manual posting and clearing selected items z Generation of a repayment request if the payment use cannot be determined

i n t e r n a l

C S C

New payment lot

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Payment Lot: Postprocessing

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-55

Cash journal

z Cash structure z Automatic processes z Special functions z Role concepts z Evaluations

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

• Automatic processes

- Create lot and close • Special functions - Deposits and withdrawals as G/L account postings - Transfer persons responsible (only makes sense when using role concept) - Closing cash desk • Role concept (head of subsidiary, cashier with special authorization, cashier) • Evaluations can be carried out at the moment using the cash balance or historically (for each subsidiary, cash desk, user...)

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-56

o n l y

- Default values: Company code, clearing account and lots that have already been created are proposed according to payment category. This is also the case for cash structure allocation.

C S C

F o r

„ The cash journal offers further functionalities:

b y

„ You can store your company's cash structure in the cash journal. The cash structure includes the company cash desks in individual subsidiaries and forms the master data (two-level hierarchy) as prerequisite for the cash journal.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Deutsche Bank Pay the bearer

Date Signature The p rinted ch eck t ext m ust not b e alter ed i n an y way.

Check no.

00000150900

X

Account no.

X Amount

X

Sort code

12131400

X Text

67291500 11

Do not write in or stamp this field.

Business partner

Contract account

Contract account

Post Post directly directly

Contract Document number

Post Post in in dialog dialog

Net due date Payment form no.

C S C

b y

u s e

- 400,-

New York 1.4.1996

City

Payment Payment posting posting

Check deposit list

Receipt

 SAP AG 2003

„ You can use a payment proposal from clearing control or assign the payment manually. „ A distinction is made between cash payments and payment by check or credit card. Incoming and outgoing payments can also be processed. „ A receipt can be printed following the posting. „ If an overpayment is made in cash, the remaining amount is used to decide whether a posting on account is to be made or whether this amount is to be paid to the customer.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-57

o n l y

„ Within the cash desk function, payments can be directly allocated to open items for a business partner.

C S C

„ If the cash journal is deactivated, you can only use the cash desk function.

b y

„ The cash desk is integrated in the cash journal. This means that all incoming and outgoing payments are posted using the cash desk. You can navigate directly from the cash journal to the cash desk and from the cash desk to the cash journal. The system transfers the cash desk allocated to an agent and other settings (determined by the system or made by the user) to the cash desk. If you use the transaction cash journal, you cannot call the cash desk transaction directly.

u s e

i n t e r n a l

€

Red Cross

ON Or the holder

i n t e r n a l

F o r

CurrencyAmount

- four hundred

Amount in words

F o r

o n l y

Payment at cash desk

Clearing: Dialog Processing z Open items are displayed: „

In a list with one line per item and

„

In a control block that displays the status of clearing processing

„

The difference between the clearing amount and the allocated amount is decisive here

„

The allocated amount is the sum of the clearing amounts that are allocated to the individual items.

z The clearing can be posted if the difference: „

Is zero (green light appears)

„

Is within a predefined tolerance limit (yellow light appears)

o n l y

F o r

IUT110

13-58

i n t e r n a l

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

C S C

„ The processing screen can be reconfigured by pressing the Presentation key. You can switch between selection mode and command mode. The summarization of items in the display can be switched on and off. The line structure (information displayed on open items) can be varied. You can hide or display cash discount fields as well as display posting and clearing amounts as net or gross. You can change the currency that is displayed.

b y

„ Open item processing: By double-clicking in the Amount column, inactive items become active and vice versa. As soon as an item is active, a value appears in the "Clearing amount” column. The posting amount of the item is proposed. The clearing amount can be overwritten (partial clearing). By double-clicking in the Clearing amount column, the system sets the amount that is necessary to bring the clearing to zero. Items can also be set to active and inactive in groups. To do this, select the items in the left column and then press the desired key (active or inactive).

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

Payments: Summary

z Payment can be handled automatically and manually in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable. z Payments are processed: „

In payment lots

„

At the cash desk

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

z In clearing control, you can create detailed specifications for automatically clearing items, which can be changed during processing in dialog mode.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-59

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Returns

z

Overview

z

Documents

z

Display account balance

z

Payments

z Returns z

Dunning

z

Installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-60

Returns: Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: z Describe returns processing z Post a return

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-61

Returns: Introduction

z Utility companies must deal with a large number of incoming and outgoing payments. z A certain percentage of these cannot be successfully processed because the account is incorrect, closed, or not covered z The additional workload is kept as low as possible by: Reversing payment to the account

„

Passing on charges

„

Triggering subsequent activities such as correspondence or re-posting after the payment method has been locked for a limited period

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

SAP Utilities

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-62

Returns: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-63

Returns: Influencing Factors

Customer creditworthiness and tolerance group

Returns reason

Number of returns

Return category

Returns

o n l y

F o r

„ Company-specific returns reasons can be allocated bank-specific returns reasons.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

„ Every return category is allocated to a return reason. Return reasons can have the same category. The return category determines the accounts used (G/L accounts for returns charges and bank clearing account).

b y

„ A business partner's creditworthiness provides information on his or her payment behavior. The creditworthiness value is made up of a manual and an automatic value. The automatic creditworthiness value is determined by multiplying the credit numbers from credit-relevant processes (for example dunning, returns) with the time-dependent credit rating and adding the results. Creditworthiness is then calculated using the following formula: Creditworthiness = automatic credit worthiness value x percentage credit factor + manual creditworthiness

o n l y

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Return amount

History

„ History Maximum number of days that have passed since an event before the event can be included in the analysis of the returns history. „ The return amount is important for: • Determining bank charges (the system interprets the difference between the return amount of the house bank and the original paid amount as a charge, and posts it accordingly) • Calculating the company's graduated charges for processing returns

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-64

Returns: Configuration Activities

Correspondence

Pass on charges with/without tax

Returns

o n l y

Calculate lot charges

b y

u s e

Dunning block - Contract account - Items

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

„ Pass on bank charges: Means that the bank passes on the returns charges to the business partner or the accompanying contract account. If this is not the case, these charges are paid by the utility company.

b y

„ Calculation of lot charge Means that the business partner has to pay a surcharge in addition to the bank charges. The amount of the lot charge depends on the amount of the returns charge.

„ The new due date for the receivable is calculated using the deferral days according to the following formula: New due date = document date or return + deferral days „ Recording a payment block reason for open items means that the open items are blocked for automatic payment with the payment program. „ Recording a blocking reason for incoming/outgoing payments in the master record of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable prevents debit memos/bank collections/payments from being initiated by the payment program.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-65

o n l y

„ By recording a dunning block reason in the master record of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable or under open items, the items due for dunning or the open items are not dunned when the dunning program is executed.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Return amount

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Post charges statistically

Payment block reasons Deferral days

F o r

F o r

Incoming payment method

New returns lot

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

Postprocessing

Change

z Returns lot processing contains the following steps: „

Create

„

Change (optional)

„

Close

„

Post

„

Postprocessing (for clarification and errors): Postprocessing is necessary if postings could not be carried out.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Returns Lot: Processing Steps

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-66

o n l y

C S C

b y

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

z A returns lot can be created: „

Using a program (such as returns lot with DTAUS)

„

In dialog mode

z The following must be specified: „

Reconciliation key

„

Whether the amount contains charges

„

Whether the amount contains taxes

„

Posting type (taking back payment, new receivables)

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

New returns lot

F o r

„ Default values on the header screen: • The current date is defined.

• Document type, clearing reason, company code and selection category are stored in Customizing as default

C S C

• The last values entered (if available) are inserted automatically for the currency and business area.

b y

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Returns Lot: Create

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-67

Returns Entry New returns lot

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

z The essential entries are: „

Amount

„

Returns reason

„

Payment document number

o n l y

F o r

„ By pressing the Additional specifications key, you can branch to the detail screen of the selected item. You can enter additional data on the payment, if required.

b y

C S C

„ On the detail screen, you can enter any additional data necessary for payment allocation or for further clarification.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

„ Enter one line of data for each return during list entry. Variants of the line structure can be recorded in Customizing. You can choose other line structures in Extras --> Screen variants

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-68

Returns Lot: Change New returns lot

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

Change

z Items can be deleted and added if the returns lot is still open. z Data on items that have already been entered can also be corrected. z Interrupted entry of a returns lot can be resumed using this function.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-69

Returns Lot: Close New returns lot

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

z Once the returns lot is closed, no more changes can be made to it. z If the returns lot has not been posted, it can be opened again. z Posting cannot begin until a lot is closed.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-70

New returns lot

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

z You can decide whether postings are to be managed: „

In dialog mode

„

In a background process

z For each return „

All activities stored in Customizing are executed

„

The returns history is written

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

The payment document and cleared items are determined

i n t e r n a l

„

F o r

o n l y

Returns Lot: Post

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-71

Returns Lot: Post-processing New returns lot

Create

Close

Post

Returns lot complete

Postprocessing

z Clarification of return use z Correction of returns item and restart posting for selected items z Manual posting and clearing for selected items

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-72

Returns History

Record of business management data for returns processing, including: - Amounts - Document numbers

Basis for future handling of the contract account dependent on: Period of examination - Number of returns Returns history

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-73

Returns: Summary

z The utility company can configure the many settings in such a way that detailed work is taken care of in the background.

„

Reversing the clearing for the contract account

„

Passing on charges with/without tax

„

Deferral of receivables

„

Setting payment and dunning blocks

„

Triggering correspondence

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

z Some of these activities are:

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-74

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Dunning

z

Overview

z

Documents

z

Display account balance

z

Payments

z

Returns

z Dunning z

Installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-75

Dunning: Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: z Describe the two-step dunning process z Display and explain the dunning history of a business partner/contract account z Name some of the influential factors in dunning

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-76

Dunning: Introduction

z Customer payments can only be reasonably controlled if they are supported by automatic processes. z If payment is delayed, dunning automatically:

SAP Utilities

„

Creates a customer letter

„

Executes further activities

„

Triggers workflows (security requirement, disconnection order)

o n l y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

F o r

z This is a general procedure and can be adjusted to company requirements and individual customers or customer groups.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-77

Dunning: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-78

o n l y

C S C

b y

Charges schema Print forms

Business partner Contract account Open items

Determining new dunning steps

Generating dunning proposals

Generating dunning activities

Posting interest and charges

Dunning history

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

„ The dunning program can be executed first as a dunning proposal and then, in a second run, as as a dunning activity run based on the dunning proposal. Items to be dunned are updated, dunning notices printed and other dunning activities are executed in the activity run. Dunning proposals and activities can also be processed in a program run.

u s e

u s e

Min. /max. amount of days in arrears Dunning frequency

F o r

C S C

„ The dunning proposal can still be processed before the dunning notice is printed.

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Dunning - Dunning Proposals and Activities

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-79

Dunning: Influential Factors

Dunning procedure

Dunning grouping

Minimum/maximu m amounts

Creditworthiness

Dunning process

o n l y

F o r

Days in arrears

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

F o r

„ Indicator: Always dun dunning level. This means that a dunning letter is always triggered in this dunning level, as soon as the dunning frequency has been reached, regardless of whether the days in arrears and the maximum / minimum amount have been reached, or whether the dunning level has been raised for any items of the same dunning grouping. „ The dunning grouping determines the criteria with which items due for dunning are additionally grouped during execution of a dunning run for example, business area, contract account, division, or contract. Items due for dunning are always grouped according to the following criteria in the dunning run: business partner, dunning procedure, currency, responsible company code, and dunning letter recipient.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-80

o n l y

„ Another condition for creation of a dunning letter is that the dunning frequency has been reached. To create another dunning letter, at least the specified number of days must have passed since the creation date of the last dunning letter.

C S C

„ Days in arrears describes the minimum number of days in arrears that must elapse after the net due date of a receivable before a dunning letter can be created.

„ A dunning can only be triggered in a dunning level if the amount of all due items of a dunning grouping exceeds the maximum amount stored in the dunning level.

b y

„ A dunning procedure can be allocated to a contract account or to individual line items in the document. Items due for dunning are dunned according to the settings in the dunning procedure and dunning data is stored in the dunning history.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Dunning frequency

Dunning Proposal for a Business Partner

Determination of all business partner accounts Reading the dunning history Calculation of creditworthiness Generation of a dunning proposal „

F o r

o n l y

„

The new dunning level is determined Dunning information is not saved for items

Writing the dunning proposal in the dunning history

u s e

• General selection criteria:

• Dynamic selection criteria (from the business partner item contract accounting document):

b y

i n t e r n a l

„ Possible selection parameters for a dunning proposal:

F o r

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

- Company code

C S C

- Business partner - Contract account

o n l y

- Net due date - Document number - Business area - Contract - Division - Document date - Posting date - Currency - All other criteria from the document item can also be used.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-81

Dunning: Configuration of Dunning Process

o n l y

Dunning charges (scale schema)

Dunning process

Payment period

Interest

C S C

Dunning activities: Customer letter Disconnection order Deactivate installment plan

i n t e r n a l

b y

Print all items

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

F o r

„ The Print all items indicator means that all due items that meet the same criteria for the dunning grouping are printed on one dunning letter. Otherwise, only the items due for dunning are printed (items that have reached the number of days in arrears specified).

o n l y

„ Creditworthiness weighting is the time-dependent factor used to include the credit points of a dunning level in creditworthiness calculation.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-82

b y

„ Payment period in days. This is calculated from the dunning issue date and used for the payment target for a dunning letter. Payment target = dunning issue date + payment period

C S C

„ Every dunning procedure can be made up of different dunning levels. Dunning levels determine the dunning intervals, the charges schema used for determining the dunning charges and the way in which interest is calculated and posted. You can also record parameters at every dunning level for printing dunning letters, and for currency-dependent minimum/maximum amounts.

u s e

u s e

Creditworthiness and credit weighting

Dunning Levels

Dunning: Determination of Dunning Level Where do the influential factors for dunning come from? Contract account Dunning procedure Dunning grouping

o n l y

b y

C S C

New dunning dunning level level

 SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

Last dunning date Last dunning level

i n t e r n a l

„ Items that have not yet been dunned have dunning level 0. „ An open item receives the next highest dunning level if:

b y

• More than the stored number of days in arrears have passed since the due date

C S C

i n t e r n a l

Due date Amount

Dunning history

F o r

• More days have passed since the due date than the number stored for the dunning frequency „ An item that is dunned more than once passes through the various dunning levels according to predefined rules. „ The highest dunning level of all items summarized in a dunning group determines which dunning activities are performed for the corresponding dunning group.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-83

o n l y

F o r

Open items

Dunning Activities for a Business Partner:

Save dunning level for receivables item Determine and post dunning charges Determine and post interest Execute dunning activities „ „

F o r

o n l y

„

Print dunning letter Deactivate installment plan, release for collection Generate disconnection document

Update dunning history

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-84

o n l y

15.12.2002

800 $

01.01.2003 800 $ 4711 Aug. 01, 2000 DL 4 200 $ 15.01.2003 1200 $ 4711 01.08.00 DL 4 200 $ 15, $ 2000 DL 4 150 $ 30.01.2003 4712 Aug. 1500 4711 01.08.96 DL 4 200 $ 4712 15.08.00 DL 4 150 $ 4713 4711 01.08.02 MS Aug. 4 20015, $ 2000 DL 3 250 $ 4712 15.08.96 DL 4 150 $ 4713 01.09.00 DL 3 250 $ 4712 Aug. 15, 1996 MS4 150 UNI 4713 01.09.96 DL 3 250 $ 4713 Sept.09,...2002 MS 3 $ 250 ... ... ...

Identification Identification of of the the dunning dunning run run

Every Every item item relevant relevant to to dunning dunning has has an an entry entry in in the the dunning dunning history history

4729 16.01.01 DL 1 120 $

4729 16.01.99 DL 1 120 $

i n t e r n a l

C S C

z Overview of all dunning levels for a business partner / contract account

F o r

4729 16.01.97 DL 1 120 $

4729 Jan.16, 2003 MS 1 $ 120  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Dunning: Dunning History

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-85

Dunning: Summary

z Dunning in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable provides flexible dunning that can be adjusted to meet the utility company's requirements. z Customer payments can be controlled efficiently. The following activities are supported: „

Customer letter

„

Creation of disconnection orders

„

Charging fees and/or taxes

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-86

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: Installment Plan

z

Overview

z

Documents

z

Display account balance

z

Payments

z

Returns

z

Dunning

z Installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-87

Installment Plan: Aims

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: z Add items to an installment plan z Recognize the main functions for processing installment plans

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-88

Installment Plan: Introduction

z Some customers are not able to keep up with payments to the utility company z In this situation, installment plans or deferrals can be arranged for one or more receivables in order to: Accommodate the customer

„

Guarantee payment

Installment plans can be created for one or more receivables

F o r

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

SAP Utilities

„

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-89

Installment Plan: Business Scenario

z Document structure and posting z Display account balance z Payment for account balance z Process returns and post charges z Dunning for the contract account z Arrangement of installment plan

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-90

z Any number of open items as the basis of an installment agreement that are kept as original items z Interest calculation for installment plans z Installment plan charges z Letter to the customer z Change, add and delete individual installments z Update installment plan for incoming payment as well as (partial) clearing of original receivables

F o r

z Deactivation of installment plans

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Installment Plan: Characteristics

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-91

Installment Plan Category Pre-definable installment plan categories make creating new installment plans easier. Installment plan parameters: Company Companyx y z Bill Bill Company xyz Company

Bill Bill

• Installment number or amount

7. Installment 5. Installment due June 01 Amount due June 01 4. Installment due 100 Amount 3. Installment due May 01 100 Amount Apr 01 2. Installment due 100 Amount Mar01 1. Installment 100 Amount due Feb01 100 100 Amount

• Installment interval

F o r

o n l y

• Interval category • Rounding amount

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

• Charges amount

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-92

Installment Plan: Summary

Simple procedure for creating and managing installment plans. z Installment plan categories make it easier to create installment plans on the basis of an enterprise model. z Either all open items, or any selection of open items, can be included. z Installment plan items are statistical document items that are saved in repetition groups.

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-93

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-94

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Manual document entry At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • •

Manually post a document Interpret the information contained in a FI-CA document and how to access this information

You are an assistant in accounts receivable accounting in your company.

o n l y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

First of all, save the following parameters in your user profile under System → User Profile → Own Data → Parameters:

u s e

u s e

b y

BUK: U100 (Company code) FWS: EUR (Currency key) 8P3: Posting without jurisdiction code) If you are in a course without US scenarios.

i n t e r n a l

b y

BUK: U300 (Company code) FWS: USD (Currency key) 8P3: X (Posting with jurisdiction code) If you are in a course with US scenarios.

C S C

Ensure that you use capital letters.

F o r

o n l y

‘Your’ business partners have the following number ranges: TBCA… for business partners without US scenarios TB13… for business partners with US scenario.

© SAP AG

IUT110

F o r

Your colleague has just completed an energy consultation. You now have to post the corresponding receivable to the business partner’s contract account.

13-95

1-1

Posting receivables 1-1-1

_____________________________________________________ 1-1-2

b y

u s e

Contents

Note

Document date

Today’s date

Is preset

Posting date

Today’s date

Is preset

Reconciliation key

01-yymmdd-##

yymmdd = Today’s date, ## = Group number

Change to entry screen for document items. For your business partner, enter a miscellaneous posting for the energy consultation. In doing so, try to make as few entries as possible, to see which data the system determines automatically. Data field

Contents

Note

Business partner

TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

Main transaction

Misc. postings

Use F4 for help

Subtransaction

Miscellaneous receivable

Use F4 help

Amount

116

Do not save your entries 1-1-4

Clarify your receivable using the following text: “Energy consultation of ”.

u s e

To add the text you must switch to another screen variant, (ZAP), (using the symbol line layout or F9). For further options, see solutions.

C S C

Post the document and note the document number.

o n l y

1-1-5

b y

i n t e r n a l

Data field

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

1-1-3

Now post a receivable for today’s energy consultation. Use the following data:

F o r

F o r

Specify the menu path that you use to post a document.

_____________________________________________________ 1-1-6

Display the document.

1-1-7

Display the document item.

1-1-8

What information does the general ledger provide? Data field

Value

Origin

Company code G/L Account Act. determ. ID

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-96

o n l y

1.

__________________________________________________

2.

__________________________________________________

3.

__________________________________________________

Are there any other criteria for determination? 1-2

True or false? 1-2-1

A document is always assigned to just one contract account. _____________________________________________________

1-2-2

Posting documents is the usual method for creating receivables in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable. _____________________________________________________

1-2-3

A document contains all the information for posting in financial accounting. _____________________________________________________

1-2-4

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Name three specifications from the document or the document item that control the determination of account assignment in financial accounting.

F o r

The document date and posting date always correspond to the entry date. _____________________________________________________

1-2-5

The reconciliation key can differ for each document item. _____________________________________________________

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

1-1-9

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-97

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-98

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Display account balance

Provide information on the balance and development of a contract account

•

Provide information on the items of a contract account

•

Use the navigation options in the item display

• Two customers want to meet with you. Before you initiate the contact, you would like to obtain a detailed picture of the recent transactions for each account.

C S C

b y

u s e

•

2-1

True or false? 2-1-1

The standard display of the items in a contract account shows all items that have been posted to that account.

2-1-2

_____________________________________________________ 2-1-3

_____________________________________________________ 2-1-4

To display the items in a customer account in another line layout, you must return to the initial screen. _____________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-99

o n l y

The list category determines the line layout (how the lines are constructed) of the item display.

C S C

You can adjust the individual account balance display so that other items (different to those in the standard display) are displayed according to user needs.

b y

_____________________________________________________

u s e

i n t e r n a l

Use the different account balance display options. This means you can display the items required for analyzing the account using the optimal field structure variant

i n t e r n a l

F o r

•

F o r

o n l y

At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:

2-2

Line item display for a business partner 2-2-1

_____________________________________________________ 2-2-2

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 2-2-3

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________

o n l y

C S C

b y

Have any payments already been made?

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 2-3

i n t e r n a l

Navigating the document display (optional) 2-3-1

Identify the receivable from the energy consultation for business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##). Tip: Choose the correct line layout variant.

2-3-2

u s e

u s e

Which items comprise the balance?

F o r

Who posted the receivable? _____________________________________________________

2-3-3

b y

Which reconciliation key was used?

C S C

_____________________________________________________ 2-3-4

Have any taxes been calculated for the energy consultation?

© SAP AG

IUT110

o n l y

_____________________________________________________

F o r

i n t e r n a l

What is the current balance for business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##)?

13-100

Exercises Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Payment run At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Explain the processing steps of a payment lot • Post payments via a payment lot •

Post payment at cash desk

• A customer comes in and would like to pay cash for an energy consultation.

Which steps must be carried out when processing a payment lot?

b y

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________

u s e

_____________________________________________________ 3-2

True or false? 3-2-1

_____________________________________________________ 3-2-2

Once the payment lot is closed, no more changes can be made to it.

o n l y

_____________________________________________________ 3-2-3

The procedures for payment lots and check lots are identical. _____________________________________________________

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

If you are interrupted while working on a payment lot, you can resume work on it at any time, provided that you do not close the payment lot.

b y

i n t e r n a l

Payment lot

u s e

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

3-1

13-101

C S C

b y

3-3-2

Enter the search term (IUT110-##) and a bank clearing account using the F4 help.

3-3-3

Enter payments for two of your business partners: Amount

Business partner

500

TBCA0210## (TB130210##)

800

TBCA0220## (TB130220##)

3-3-4

Save your entries and close the payment lot.

3-3-5

Post the payments.

3-3-6

Check the status.

3-3-7

Display the postings you have just carried out in the account display for each business partner and note the effects of the posting. Tip: Use the Payment list hotspot.

Payment at cash desk 3-4-1

Display the open receivables for business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##). What is the balance? _____________________________________________________ What items make up the total?

3-4-3

Switch to the cash journal. Select the subsidiary WDF for courses without US scenarios or BOS for training with US scenarios. Branch from here to the cash desk.

3-4-4

Post a payment for the amount of the balance of business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##). To do this, make the following entries:

C S C

Recon. key

CD-yymmdd-##

Business partner

TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

Amount

Balance of TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

o n l y

F o r

3-4-2

b y

u s e

Create a payment lot (PL-yymmdd-##).

u s e

i n t e r n a l

3-3-1

i n t e r n a l

3-4

Posting a payment lot

F o r

o n l y

3-3

Print a receipt (printer: Lt0Q).

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-102

Exercises Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Returns At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: • Post a return • Define the effects of returns on payments already made

• In accounts receivable accounting, some returns are contained in the bank statement. You now have to post these.

Returns lot 4-1-2

Enter the search term (IUT110-##). Make sure that Document is entered in the Selection Category field. The fields Amounts contain bank charges and Calculate charges should be activated. Switch to enter items.

4-1-3

Enter a return for business partner TBCA0210## (TB130210##).

u s e

b y

Create a returns lot (RL-yymmdd-##).

Save the data and close the returns lot.

4-1-5

Post the returns lot.

4-1-6

Check the status.

4-1-7

Switch to the account display and observe the changes.

o n l y

4-2

4-1-4

C S C

i n t e r n a l

If necessary, create a second session to determine the required payment document number.

b y

F o r

u s e

4-1-1

Returns lot with charges (optional) Repeat the steps of the previous task for a new returns lot (RN-yymmdd-##). Increase the return amount by 10. This time, create a return for the payment made by business partner TBCA0220## (TB130220##) that you entered in exercise 3-3-3. Analyze the charge posting in the account balance display.

© SAP AG

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

4-1

IUT110

13-103

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-104

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Dunning At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:

5-1

Display and explain the dunning history for a business partner/contract account.

•

Differentiate between various influential factors for dunning and describe the resultant activities.

True or false? The dunning process is carried out using the same procedure for all the company’s contract accounts .

F o r

5-1-1

o n l y

•

C S C

5-1-2

The days in arrears and the dunning frequency largely determine when a due open item can be dunned.

5-2

Dunning history 5-2-1

Display the dunning history for business partner TBCA0220## (TB130220##).

b y

i n t e r n a l

_____________________________________________________

u s e

u s e

b y

_____________________________________________________

i n t e r n a l

_____________________________________________________

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-105

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-106

IUT110

© SAP AG

Exercises Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Installment Plan At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to: •

Create an installment plan and describe the range of this function.

A business partner calls and wants to pay his/her open items in installments. You create an installment plan.

6-1-1

Create an installment plan with five installments at intervals of two weeks and a rounding amount of 10 for all open receivables for business partner TBCA0130## (TB130130##).

6-1-2

Check that the installment plan has been created in the account display.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

When you display the contract account from the Front Office, remember that the previous settings for the list type are still active. However, to display the installment plan, the statistical items must also be displayed.

u s e

u s e

b y

Creation of an installment plan

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

F o r

6-1

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-107

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-108

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Manual document entry

1-1

Posting receivables 1-1-1

Specify the menu path that you use to post a document. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document → Post

1-1-2

Now post a receivable for today’s energy consultation.

o n l y

C S C

Note

Document date

Today’s date

Is preset

Posting date

Today’s date

Is preset

Reconciliation key

01-yymmdd-##

yymmdd = today’s date

Change to the entry screen for document items. For your business partner, enter a miscellaneous posting for the energy consultation. In doing so, try to make as few entries as possible, so that you can see which data the system determines automatically.

C S C

1. In the Post Document: Initial Screen, either choose Enter, the green checkmark, or the BP item button (Business partner item list).

Contents

Note

Business partner

TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

Main transaction

Misc. postings

Use F4 help

Subtransaction

Miscellaneous receivable

Use F4 help

Amount

116

Amount

40

o n l y

F o r

2. Enter the following values: Data field

3. Do not save your entries

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

i n t e r n a l

1-1-3

u s e

u s e

Contents

i n t e r n a l

Data field

b y

Use the following data:

F o r

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document → Post

13-109

o n l y

To enter text: - Choose the line layout ZAP and enter the text in the text field (use the line structure symbol, or F9). - Or change to the detail display for your business partner (for example. by double-clicking on the current item in the list) and enter the text under Other data. If you have already saved the document: 1. Change to Document → Change via the menu. The document number is pre-filled. 2. Choose BP item (Business partner item list). 3. Select line structure ZAP 4. Enter the text in the text field. 1-1-5

1. To post the document, you must choose Post (CTRL S). 2. The document number is displayed in the message line after posting. 1-1-6

Display the document.

b y

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document

→ Display 1-1-7

Display the document item.

F o r

What information does the general ledger provide?

o n l y

1-1-8

Data Field

Value

Origin

Company code

U100 (U300)

Entered during “document posting”

G/L Account

140520

Account determination

Act. determ. ID

01

Contract account

Double click on the business partner item. The fields company code and G/L account are located on the Basic Data tab page. The account determination ID is on the Add. Data tab page.

© SAP AG

IUT110

C S C

In the screen Display Document: Initial Screen, choose Enter or the green checkmark. Then double-click on the summary of business partner items, or select the item with the cursor and use Edit → Choose (F2) from the menu to display the business partner item.

b y

From the Display Document: Initial Screen, choose BP item (Business partner item list) to display the document items. Another possible solution:

u s e

u s e

Post the document and make a note of the document number.

i n t e r n a l

i n t e r n a l

Clarify your receivable using the following text: “Energy consultation of ”.

F o r

C S C

1-1-4

13-110

1. Company code in the document item 2. Main transaction in the document item 3. Subtransaction in the document item Other criteria include the account determination ID and the division. 1-2

True or false? 1-2-1

False. A document can have more than one document item, each of which can be assigned to another contract account or business partner. 1-2-2

Posting documents is the usual method for creating receivables in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable. False. The usual method of creating receivables is by invoicing.

1-2-3

A document contains all the information for posting in financial accounting. True. It is possible, that a document is grouped together with other documents (via the reconciliation key), but each individual document contains information for posting and offsetting in financial accounting.

C S C

b y

A document is always assigned to just one contract account.

1-2-4

The document date and posting date always correspond to the entry date. False. These three dates may be different. The reconciliation key can differ for each document item.

u s e

1-2-5

i n t e r n a l

False. For each document there is only one reconciliation key.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Name three specifications from the document or the document item that control the determination of account assignment in financial accounting.

F o r

o n l y

1-1-9

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-111

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-112

IUT110

© SAP AG

o n l y

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Display account balance

2-1

True or false? 2-1-1

The standard display of the items in a customer account shows all items that are posted to that account. False – the standard display shows all open non-statistical items.

2-1-2

The line item display can be modified to display items other than those preconfigured in the standard settings. True. You define your own line item display by choosing Settings → Display/ Change (F6).

2-1-3

False. The list category determines which items are displayed.

b y

2-1-4

To display the items in a contract account in another line layout, you must return to the initial screen.

u s e

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

If a totals variant is active, you can double-click an item to display a more detailed line layout variant. Alternatively, you can use the blue arrows (provided you have activated them in your personal settings for account balance display).

u s e

False. You can change the line layout in the item display using select line layout (shift+F4) or using Settings → Line Layout or Settings → Display/Change (you can then save the selected line layout in the user parameters)

i n t e r n a l

The list category determines the line layout (how the lines are constructed) of the item display.

F o r

C S C

Solutions

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-113

Line item display for a business partner 2-2-1

What is the current balance for business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##)? 1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account → Account Balance 2. Enter business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##) in the Business partn. field. The List type field is preset in the standard with ‘Standard – all open items’; the field Line layout displays Standard line layout – account display. 3. Choose the green checkmark (ENTER). 4. Choose the Totals hotspot. 5. The balance appears in the Total field.

2-2-2

Which items comprise the balance? Double-click on the Receivables line or on the Total line to return to the display of the receivables that are still open. Alternatively, directly choose the Receivables hotspot.

2-2-3

Have any payments already been made?

C S C

b y

2. Choose either a List category that displays more than only the open items (using F4 help, for example List category All items) or press the Detail button in the List type subscreen. Select the Cleared items field and choose ENTER (green checkmark).

u s e

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

3. Return to the account display. This displays all payments made that can be analyzed using the payment list hotspot.

i n t e r n a l

1. Use Back (F3) to return to the screen Account Display: Initial Screen.

F o r

o n l y

2-2

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-114

Navigating the document display (optional) 2-3-1

Tip: Choose the correct line layout variant. 1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account → Account Balance 2. Enter business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##) in the Business partn. field. 3. Press the green checkmark (ENTER). 4. Press the button Line layout (Shift+F4). 5. Select the line layout variant Account display with document text (IUT110) by double-clicking on it. 6. Now you can see which of the open receivables is the one for the energy consultation (if you happened to have entered the text “Energy consultation” in the corresponding exercise). 2-3-2

Who posted the receivable?

i n t e r n a l

C S C

1. Double-click on the receivable. You are now in the screen Display Document: Item. 2. Choose Document header CTRL+F4.

b y

3. You can read the user key of the creator from the Created by field. 2-3-3

Which reconciliation key was used?

u s e

Contained in the Recon. key field in the document header. 2-3-4

Have any taxes been calculated for the energy consultation? Press the button Overview F7 or use Goto → Overview F7 from the menu. You can view the detailed tax items using the Taxes (control + F6) button.

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

Identify the receivable from the energy consultation for business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##).

F o r

o n l y

2-3

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-115

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-116

IUT110

© SAP AG

o n l y

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Payment run

3-1

Payment lot Which steps must be carried out when processing a payment lot? 1. Create 2. Close 3. Post

3-2

True or false? 3-2-1

True. The Change step exists for this purpose. 3-2-2

b y

False. While it is true that no new items can be added and items cannot be deleted, existing items can be corrected. 3-2-3

The procedures for payment lots and check lots are identical.

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

True. The only difference is that a different screen variant must be chosen for the line layout, as a check number must be entered for a check, but this does not happen in the screen variant for the payment lot.

u s e

u s e

Once the payment lot is closed, no more changes can be made to it.

i n t e r n a l

If you are interrupted while working on a payment lot, you can resume work on it at any time, provided that you do not close the payment lot.

F o r

C S C

Solutions

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-117

3-3

Posting a payment lot 3-3-1

Create a payment lot (PL-yymmdd-##). 1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Payments → Payment Lot. 2. Enter PL-yymmdd-## in the Lot field. 3. Choose Create (F5).

3-3-2

Enter the search term (IUT110-##) and a bank clearing account. 1. Search term: IUT110-##. 2. Bank clearing account: selection via the possible entries for Bank clrg acct (F4 help). Choose an account and enter today’s date as the value date – if this is not already preset.

3-3-3

Enter payments for two of your business partners:

o n l y

500

TBCA0210## (TB130210##)

800

TBCA0220## (TB130220##)

3-3-4

1. Choose Save (CTRL+S).

3. Choose Back (F3) again. You have returned to the Payment lot: Initial Screen. Observe the change in status during the following activities. 4. Choose Close and confirm the action. Post the payments.

o n l y

3-3-5

1. To do this, choose Post. 2. Choose Start Online. 3. Press the green checkmark (OK Enter). 3-3-6

Check the status. The status should read “Postings made”.

3-3-7

Display the postings you have just carried out in the account display for each business partner and note the effects of the posting. Use the skills you learned in the FI-CA 2 unit “Display Account Balance”. Tip: Use the Payment list hotspot.

© SAP AG

C S C

i n t e r n a l

2. Choose Back (F3). You now see the Payment lot Create: Default Entries and Status screen .

b y

F o r

Save your entries and close the payment lot.

u s e

u s e

b y

The business partner number has to be stored in the Selection value field in selection category ‘G’.

i n t e r n a l

Business partner

F o r

Amount

C S C

To enter the item, chose the New items pushbutton (F5).

IUT110

13-118

3-4

Payment at cash desk 3-4-1

1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account → Account Balance 2. Enter business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##) in the Business partn. field. 3. Press the green checkmark (ENTER). 4. Choose the Totals hotspot. The balance of open items is located in the Total field. 3-4-2

1. Double-click on the receivables field in the totals display. This takes you to the individual receivables display.

C S C

o n l y

2. Ensure that you have chosen the line layout variant Account display with document text (IUT110) to display the document text column. Item type

116,00

Other receivables: Energy consultation from (from the Post Document exercise)

Switch to the cash journal. Select the subsidiary WDF for courses without US scenarios or BOS for training with US scenarios. Branch from here to the cash desk.

Post a payment for the amount of the open balance of business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##). To do this, make the following entries: CD-yymmdd-## (Under Further posting specs)

Business partner

TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

Amount

Balance of TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

o n l y

Recon. key

C S C

F o r

3-4-4

1. Ensure that the field Incoming cash paymt is selected. 2. To post the payment, choose Post item or Post item online. If you have chosen Post item online, use the save button to post the item (ctrl + S). 3. Select Print Receipt and confirm the print parameters.

© SAP AG

IUT110

b y

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Payments → Cash Journal → Cash Journal → To cash desk.

u s e

u s e

3-4-3

Amount

i n t e r n a l

b y

Which items make up the total?

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Display the open receivables for business partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##). What is the balance?

13-119

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-120

IUT110

© SAP AG

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Returns

4-1

Returns lot 4-1-1

1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Payments → Returns Lot. 2. Enter RL-yymmdd-## in the Returns lot field. 3. Choose Create (F5).

C S C

4-1-2

Enter the search term (IUT110-##). Make sure that Document is entered in the Selection Category field. Ensure that the fields Amounts contain bank charges and Calculate charges are activated. Switch to enter items. 1. Search term: IUT110-##.

i n t e r n a l

b y

2. Choose the above settings and save them using Save (CTRL+S), if these were not already chosen. 3. Choose New items. 4-1-3

Enter a return for business partner TBCA0210## (TB130210##).

u s e

If necessary, create a second session to determine the required payment document number. 2. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account → Account Balance

4. Choose the standard list category All items and line layout Account display with text (IUT110).

b y

i n t e r n a l

1. System → Create session

F o r

u s e

Create a returns lot (RL-yymmdd-##).

F o r

o n l y

Solutions

6. Note or copy the payment document number. 7. Close the second session: System Æ End session. 8. In the Enter/Maintain Returns Items screen enter the payment document number in the SelectionValue field. The selection type should be set to B. Choose return reason 01 (Bank account overdraft). 9. Choose Enter. The amount and the return reason are determined automatically.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-121

o n l y

5. Choose the green checkmark (ENTER).

C S C

3. Enter business partner TBCA0210## (TB130210##) in the Business partn. field.

4-1-4

1. Choose Save (CTRL+S). 2. Choose Back (F3). You now see the Returns: Specifications and Status: Edit screen. 3. Choose Back (F3). You are now looking at the Returns: Request Screen. 4. Choose Close and confirm the action. 4-1-5

1. To do this, choose Post. 2. Choose Start Online. 3. Choose OK. 4-1-6

The status should read “Postings made”. 4-1-7

o n l y

C S C

b y

Check the status. Switch to the account display and observe the changes. Use the Payment list hotspot.

4-2

Returns lot with charges (optional) Repeat the steps of the previous task for a new returns lot (RN-yymmdd-##). Increase the return amount by 10. This time, generate a return for the payment entered for business partner TBCA0220## (TB130220##) in exercise 3-3-3.

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

Post the returns lot.

F o r

Solution as for 4-1. In the account display, you will notice that the bank charges contained in the return amount were posted together as one item with the utility company’s charges.

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Save the data and close the returns lot.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-122

Solutions Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Dunning

5-1

True or false? 5-1-1

False. The dunning procedure can be defined in the contract account and can be applied even to individual items.

b y

True. The days in arrears determine the minimum number of days that must have passed since the due date before dunning can occur. The dunning frequency defines the number of days that must have passed since the issue date of the dunning letter before another dunning letter can be sent. 5-2

Dunning history Display the dunning history for business partner TBCA0220## (TB130220##). 1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account → Other Information → Dunning History. 2. Enter TBCA0220## (TB130220##) in the Business partner field.

u s e

u s e

The days in arrears and the dunning frequency largely determine when a due open item can be dunned.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

5-1-2

F o r

b y

3. Press Execute (F8). 4. The dunning history is displayed.

C S C

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

The dunning process is carried out using the same procedure for all the company’s contract accounts .

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-123

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-124

IUT110

© SAP AG

Solutions Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable Topic: Installment Plan

6-1

Creation of an installment plan 6-1-1

1. Utilities Industry Æ Customer Service Æ Front Office/Customer Interaction Center Æ Customer Interaction Center

o n l y

2. Enter TBCA0130## (TB130130##) in the field Business partner (in the search criteria). Choose Enter to display the business partner’s data. Then choose Confirm partner.

C S C

b y

4. Choose all open items by pressing the Select all (Shift+F7)button.

u s e

11. Check the number of installments and the installment intervals and select Save or Cntrl+S.

b y

13. Enter a text for the contact and save by selecting Save or Cntrl+S. Check that the installment plan has been created in the account display.

F o r

Select the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and choose the customer account. If no items are selected, the statistical items display is not activated under list type. You can choose another list type on the initial screen for account balance display.

© SAP AG

IUT110

13-125

o n l y

When you display the customer account from the CIC, remember that the previous settings for the list type are still active. However, to display the installment plan, the statistical items must also be displayed.

C S C

6-1-2

u s e

5. Enter in the start date field and enter the desired parameters in the fields No. of Inst., Inst. Interval, Interval Category and Rounding Amount. Choose Installment plan or ENTER.

i n t e r n a l

3. The business partner environment is displayed in the navigation area. Select the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and choose Create Installment plan.

F o r

i n t e r n a l

Create an installment plan with five installments at intervals of two weeks and a rounding amount of 10 for all open receivables for business partner TBCA0130## (TB130130##).

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

13-126

IUT110

© SAP AG

Waste Industry

Contents: Solution map and integration model for the waste industry Development areas Data model Business processes Planned Functions

o n l y

F o r

o n l y

F o r

i n t e r n a l

C S C

The container forms the basis for the calculation. This is emptied by a waste disposal company. Billing takes into account container and premise data.

b y

The Waste Management component allows you to map and bill periodic and aperiodic waste disposal services for residential and commercial/industrial customers. Logistics and billing-related business processes are supported here.

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-1

Waste Industry: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Describe terms and contexts that relate to waste in the mySAP Waste Industry

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-2

o n l y

Strategic Enterprise Business Analytics Management

Customer Relationship Management

Marketing

Contract & Permission Inquiry & Quotation Management Management

Customer Services

Waste Logistics

Revenue Management

Business Support

On-Call Services

Transfer Station

Billing

Human Resources Operations Sourcing & Deployment

Business Intelligence & Decision Support

Accounting

Workforce Planning & Alignment

Sales

Configuration & Pricing

Sales Agreement

Scheduled Services

Incineration Plants

Guarantor Billing

Financial Procurement Supply Chain Management

Service

Third Party Agreement

Landfill Sites

Third Party Disposal Facilities

Third Party Billing

Treasury/ Corporate Finance Management

Waste Classification

Cleaning Service & Winter Maintenance

Bulk Waste Services

Recycling Plants

Regulatory Reporting/FERC

Fixed Asset Management

Legal Permissions & Approvals

Other Services

Traceability & Fleet Management Legal Reporting

Invoicing

Real Estate

Receivables Management

Industrial Hygiene & Safety

Occupational Health

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Enterprise Management

F o r

b y

Solution Map mySAP Utilities – Waste Management

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-3

Solution for Waste Management: Concept

mySAP mySAP PLM PLM mySAP HR IS-Waste

mySAP BI BI mySAP CRM

i n t e r n a l

C S C

o n l y

mySAP Enterprise Portals

mySAP FI

F o r

Our experience: Waste management is not a specialized area of the utilities industry but rather an industry in its own right!  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

mySAP SCM SCM IS-Utilities

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-4

Interaction Between SAP solutions

SAP IS-U Waste Contracts

Order processing

Legal . doc.

Invoicing/ billing

Legal checks Legal papers

Accounting

Human Resource Management

o n l y

Legal classification

SAP Core

Plant Maintenance

F o r

Purchasing

Materials Management

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Inventory management/ warehouse management Customer Relationship Management  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

SAP EH&S Waste

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-5

Development Areas I Development teams mySAP.com mySAP.com

IBU IBU Utilities Utilities Waste Waste Management Management

Environment, Environment, Health Health & & Safety Safety Waste Waste Management Management

o n l y

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

By By combining combining the the components components listed listed above, above, SAP SAP wants wants to to provide provide an an all-round all-round solution solution for for the the waste waste disposal disposal industry. industry.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

F o r

Customer Customer Relationship Relationship Management Management

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-6

Development teams mySAP Supplier Relationship Management mySAP.com mySAP.com

mySAP E-Procurement mySAP Business Intelligence IBU IBU Utilities Utilities Waste Waste Management Management

mySAP Product Lifecycle Management mySAP Human Resources mySAP Financials

Environment, Environment, Health Health & & Safety Safety Waste Waste Management Management

mySAP Mobile Business mySAP Enterprise Portal Fleet Management Logistics/Plant Maintenance

C S C

Customer Customer Relationship Relationship Management Management

i n t e r n a l

By By combining combining the the components components listed listed above, above, SAP SAP wants wants to to provide provide an an all-round all-round solution solution for for the the waste waste disposal disposal industry. industry.  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

mySAP Supply Chain Management

F o r

o n l y

Development Areas II

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-7

Development teams mySAP.com mySAP.com SAP IS-U-WA/LOG IBU IBU Utilities Utilities Waste Waste Management Management

Environment, Environment, Health Health & & Safety Safety Waste Waste Management Management

Generic interfaces to the route planning system, geographical information systems, weighing data systems and on-board computers SAP IS-U-WA/BIL/ICA Flat-rate and service-related billing System specially developed for dealing with mass data in billing, invoicing, and accounting

By By combining combining the the components components listed listed above, above, SAP SAP wants wants to to provide provide an an all-round all-round solution solution for for the the waste waste disposal disposal industry industry  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Logistic business processes: Creating / changing / deleting / outputting / confirming waste disposal orders, resource planning, capacity planning, delivery / removal / replacement of containers, cleaning and winter maintenance, processing bulk waste.

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Customer Customer Relationship Relationship Management Management

Waste disposal-specific master data

F o r

o n l y

Development Areas III

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-8

Development teams mySAP.com mySAP.com

IBU IBU Utilities Utilities Waste Waste Management Management

Environment, Environment, Health Health & & Safety Safety Waste Waste Management Management

Dispatch note Internal/external waste disposal Administration of waste approval

C S C

Customer Customer Relationship Relationship Management Management

Creation of waste balances and waste management concepts

i n t e r n a l

By By combining combining the the components components listed listed above, above, SAP SAP wants wants to to provide provide an an all-round all-round solution solution for for the the waste waste disposal disposal industry industry  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Disposal of waste that requires monitoring or special monitoring in accordance with international statutory regulations, as well as light commercial waste

F o r

o n l y

Development Areas IV

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-9

Development teams mySAP.com mySAP.com

IBU IBU Utilities Utilities Waste Waste Management Management

Environment, Environment, Health Health & & Safety Safety Waste Waste Management Management

Order fulfillment (fulfillment analyses, logistics management ...) Customer service (service analyses, customer service and help desk, enterprise intelligence, field service...)

By By combining combining the the components components listed listed above, above, SAP SAP wants wants to to provide provide an an all-round all-round solution solution for for the the waste waste disposal disposal industry industry  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Business transactions (sales analyses, contact management, telesales, mobile sales, internet pricing and configuration, order acquisition...)

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Customer Customer Relationship Relationship Management Management

Customer engagement (marketing analyses, campaign management, telemarketing...)

F o r

o n l y

Development Areas V

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-10

Interfaces Between SAP and External Systems Weighting data system Master Master data data movement movement data data

Business Business objects objects

Confirmation Confirmation record record

C S C

Master Master data data movement movement data data

GIS

Route, Route, sequence, sequence, start start date date etc..... etc.....

i n t e r n a l

Route planning system  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Movement Movement data data

F o r

o n l y

Board computer

Weighing Weighing data data record record

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-11

Data Model: Waste Disposal for Industrial Customers Business master data Customer Contract account Contract

o n l y

Contract item for one-off service

Contract Plant with container locations

Object allocation Container category

Container

Waste

Service Frequency

Route

Container Location

Contract item for scheduled service Vehicle

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

Human resources

C S C

Disposal object

F o r

b y

Technical master data

Business partner

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-12

Data Model: Waste Disposal for Private Customers Business master data Customer Contract account Contract

o n l y

Contract item for one-off service

Contract

Apartment

House with apartments and container locations

Object allocation Container category

Container

Waste

Service Frequency

Route

Container Location

Contract item for scheduled service

i n t e r n a l

Human resources

C S C

Disposal object

F o r

Vehicle

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Technical master data

Business partner

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-13

Data Model: Waste Disposal Order Order header Route, date vehicle, human resources, start/finish time, distance, fuel and so on

Order item

Cust., service address, service area, container cat., (serial no.), waste and so on…

Order item n Weighing data record 1 Waste, gross/tare weight, volume, plant, vehicle number, time and so on...

o n l y

Weighing data record n Resources record 1

b y

C S C

Vehicle/driver/loader, actual start date, actual start/finish time, breaks and so on...

Resources record n  SAP AG 2003

u s e

u s e

i n t e r n a l

It is possible to enter one to n weighing records for a waste disposal order Different kind of weighing scenarios

b y

• Vehicle completes tour, drives to landfill at the end of tour and drives back to depot • Vehicle does first part of tour, drives to landfill, does second part of the tour, drives half-full back to depot. On the next day the vehicle does first part of next day’s tour and drives to landfill = overlapping allocation

C S C

• Vehicle does a tour and drives multiple times to landfill during the tour

o n l y

i n t e r n a l

F o r

F o r

1

• Vehicle drives to customer 1, drives to landfill, drives to customer 2, drives to landfill, etc.

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-14

Business Process: Overview

Customer Regular One off

Waste disposal documents

Depot Contract

Own waste disposal installation

Waste disposal documents

o n l y

Planning

Inbound/ outbound weighing

External waste disposal installation

Sorting / storage

Waste disposal planning

F o r

C S C

External/internal landfill site

i n t e r n a l

Legal documents  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Order management

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-15

Business Process: Standard Example I

Identify customer

Accept / reject quotation

Planning

Output (as document or file)

Create order

o n l y

Confirmation 1: Weighing records

C S C

Final Disposal

Execution

Billing Invoicing

Bill verification

i n t e r n a l

Sorting Recycling Repackaging

Confirmation 2: Service data

Create master data

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create offer

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-16

Business Process: Standard Example II

Identify customer

Create Order

C S C

Sales process

Output (as document or file)

Planning

Confirmation 2: Service data

Final Disposal

Execution

Billing Invoicing

Bill verification

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create master data

F o r

o n l y

Confirmation 1: Weighing records

Sorting Recycling Repackaging

Accept / reject quotation

Create quotation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-17

Business Process: Standard Example III

Identify customer

Create Create Order Order

o n l y

Confirmation 1: Weighing records

C S C

Create master data

Output Output (as (as document document or or file) file)

Execution Execution

Confirmation 2: Service data

Final Disposal

Order process Billing Invoicing

Bill verification

i n t e r n a l

Sorting Recycling Repackaging

Planning Planning

Accept / reject quotation

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create quotation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-18

Business Process: Standard Example IV

Identify customer

Create Order

o n l y

Confirmation 1: Weighing records

C S C

Create master data

Output (as document or file)

Execution

Billing process

Confirmation 2: Service data

Final Disposal

Billing Invoicing

Bill verification

i n t e r n a l

Sorting Recycling Repackaging

Planning

Accept / reject quotation

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create quotation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-19

Business Process: Standard Example V

Identify customer

Create Order

o n l y

Confirmation 1: Weighing records

C S C

Create master data

Output (as document or file)

Execution

Confirmation 2: Service data

Billing Invoicing

Waste disposal installation Final Bill

Disposal

verification

i n t e r n a l

Sorting Recycling Repackaging

Planning

Accept / reject quotation

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Create quotation

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-20

¨ Allocation of waste disposal orders (for example, one-off service) to vehicle and human resources

¨ Reallocation of a waste disposal order (for example, regular service) to different routes

¨ Online query of available resources ¨ VEHICLE: Check in the SAP component Plant Maintenance to determine if a vehicle is already scheduled for open repairs or maintenance work on a particular day

¨ HUMAN RESOURCES: Check in the SAP component Human Resources Management to determine whether an employee is available on a particular day (for example, not ill, on holiday and so on...)

F o r

¨ Maintenance of the sequence of order items (customer stops) in a

i n t e r n a l

waste disposal order

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

Planning

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-21

o n l y

Weighing 1

Rubble Weight 1.1 tons Plant 1 Storage 1-1

Rubble Weight 1.1 tons Plant 1 Storage 1-1

Plant 1

Date: 10.28.02

Weighing 2 Paper Weight 1.8 tons Plant 1 Storage 1-2 Date: 10.28.02

Weighing n Rubble Weight 0.9 tons Plant 1 Storage 1-1

Date: 10.28.02 2000

Storage 1-1

Storage 1-2

• Rubble 10.28.02: 1.1 tons (Goods movement number 1000)

• Paper 10.28.02: 1.8 tons (Goods movement number 3000)

• Rubble 10.29.02: 0.9 tons (Goods movement number 2000)

Date: 10.29.02

Weighing 2 Paper Weight 1.8 tons Plant 1 Storage 1-2 Date: 10.28.02 3000

Weighing n Rubble Weight 0.9 tons Plant 1 Storage 1-1 Date: 10.29.02 1000

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Weighing 1

F o r

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Weighing: Integration in inventory management

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-22

Confirmation ¨ The following confirmation options exist: ¨ Confirmation of individual order items ¨ Collective confirmation for one route (header level) ¨ Negative confirmation ¨ Confirmation in two steps (order item must be released for billing by a second person)

¨ Confirmation of additional services with individual prices ¨ n : m allocation of weighing data records to confirmation records

o n l y

F o r

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-23

Latest Developments I ¨ Integration of Environment Health & Safety (EH&S) ¨ Country-specific waste disposal regulations have to be abided by (especially hazardous waste). Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S) supplies the necessary data for this. Integration enables you to use the relevant functions from EH&S WA for logistics processes in IS-U-WA. The integration contains the following scenarios: Master data Create/plan waste disposal orders Output waste disposal orders

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Confirm waste disposal orders

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-24

Latest Developments II ¨ Guarantor billing ¨ Guarantors (for example, DSD, INTERSEROH, VfW), based on the waste fraction and regional waste disposal areas play an important role in the waste disposal process. Quantity splitting: Fixed default values are defined for quantity splitting.These are dependent on the guarantor, customer, waste fraction and waste disposal territory Price splitting: Billing function The customer pays a share of the price for disposal of a waste fraction. The share and the Guarantor normally determines the share and the price.

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

o n l y

F o r

Guarantor billing: Depending on the agreement made with the guarantor, the service rendered must be verified by submitting the appropriate documentation. The confirmed waste disposal documents form the basis of this information.

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-25

o n l y

¨ User-Friendly: Central point of entry, faster access to all important data

¨ Concentration on waste disposal business processes

¨ Flexibility ¨ Can be implemented in private and communal waste disposal companies

¨ Supports regular and one-off services

¨ Integration of all application areas ¨ Homogenous interaction between logistics and accounting processes

¨ Cross-application business processes

¨ Scalability ¨ Can be implemented in a company with 10,000 to 10,000,000 customers

¨ Open architecture ¨ Generic interfaces for route planning, weighing data system, GIS and on-board computers

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

 SAP AG 2003

i n t e r n a l

C S C

¨ Customer orientation using the CIC

F o r

b y

The Strengths of mySAP Utilities Waste Management

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-26

Release Strategy and Integration Q2/2001

4.6C

Q1/2002

Q2/2002

Q3/2002

Q4/2002

Q1/2003

Q2/2003

4.7 (Enterprise) EH&S

R/3 Standard

2.7B (4.6C)

o n l y

EH&S WA

4.63

4.64

4.71*

(4.6C)

(4.6C)

(4.7)

i n t e r n a l

C S C

Q4/2001

F o r

IS-U-WA

* scheduled  SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

Q3/2001

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-27

Further Information ¨ SAP Service Marketplace (http://service.sap.com) ¨ Solution Details

Industry Solutions mySAP Utilities Product Information Waste Management

¨ SAPNet ¨ Solutions

Industry Solutions mySAP Utilities Product Information Waste Management

¨ SAP Help Portal (http://help.sap.com)

o n l y

Waste Management

i n t e r n a l

 SAP AG 2003

b y

i n t e r n a l

u s e

u s e

b y

C S C

mySAP Utilities

F o r

¨ mySAP.com Industry Solutions

C S C

F o r

o n l y

© SAP AG

IUT110

14-28